PROJECT
MANUAL
Concourse B Fire Alarm
Replacement Re-Bid
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
Division 2
Technical Specifications
Issued for Bid March 2016
CITY & COUNTY OF DENVER
DEPARTMENT OF AVIATION
SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
C.
1.3
Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.
Demolition and removal of selected site elements.
Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.
Repair procedures for selective demolition operations.
Section 011000 "Summary" for restrictions on the use of the premises,
Owner-occupancy requirements, and phasing requirements.
Section 024116 "Structure Demolition" for demolition of buildings and
structures.
Section 311000 "Site Clearing" for site clearing and removal of aboveand below-grade improvements.
Alternates: Refer to Division 01 Section 012300 "Alternates" for description of
Work in this Section affected by Alternates.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them
off-site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and
reinstalled.
B.
Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a
manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner ready for reuse.
C.
Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for
reuse, and reinstall where indicated.
D.
Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be
permanently removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed,
removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.
1.4
MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A.
Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or
otherwise indicated to remain DIA’s property, demolished materials shall
become the Contractor's property and shall be removed from the Project site.
B.
Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to,
cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and
other items of interest or value to Owner that may be uncovered during
demolition remain the property of Owner.
1.
1.5
A.
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
Predemolition Conference:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.6
A.
Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to
Owner.
Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively
demolished.
Review structural load limitations of existing structure.
Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of
materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make
progress and avoid delays.
Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on
substrates exposed by selective demolition operations.
Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires
protection.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
Qualification Data:
1.
2.
For firms and persons specified in Section 014510 "Contractor Quality
Control" to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of
completed projects with project names and addresses, names and
addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
For refrigerant recovery technician.
B.
Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including drawings, that
indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property and
proposed time frame for their operation. Identify options if proposed measures
are later determined to be inadequate. Indicate proposed locations and
construction of barriers.
C.
Submit Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities. Indicate the Following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting
and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's DIA's and other
tenant's on-site operations are uninterrupted.
Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be
interrupted.
Do not interrupt utility services without prior written request and approval
from DIA Project Manager and authorities having jurisdiction.
Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.
Use of elevator and stairs.
Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing
building and of Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work.
D.
Inventory: Submit a list of items to be removed and salvaged and deliver to
Owner prior to start of demolition.
E.
Predemolition Photographs or Video: Submit before Work begins.
F.
Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician
responsible for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was
present was recovered and that recovery was performed according to EPA
regulations. Include name and address of technician and date refrigerant was
recovered.
G.
Warranties: Documentation indicated that existing warranties are still in effect
after completion of selective demolition.
1.7
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.
B.
Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a
landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes.
C.
As-Built Plans: Submit complete as-built plans of all Work, including interface
with other Work, in accordance with requirements as specified in Section
013300 "Submittal Procedures".
1.8
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations
before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal
regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.
C.
Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an
EPA-approved certification program.
1.9
A.
FIELD CONDITIONS
When there are occupied portions of buildings immediately adjacent to
selective demolition area, conduct selective demolition so DIA’s or tenant’s
operations will not be disrupted.
1.
Provide not less than 72 hours’ notice to DIA Project Manager of activities
that will affect DIA’s or tenant’s operations.
B.
Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied
or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other
occupied or used facilities without written permission from authorities having
jurisdiction.
C.
DIA assumes no responsibility for condition of areas to be selectively
demolished. DIA will maintain conditions existing at time of inspection for
bidding purpose as far as practical.
D.
Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained
by Owner as far as practical.
E.
Notify DIA Project Manager of discrepancies between existing conditions and
Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.
F.
Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be
encountered in the Work.
1.
2.
G.
Hazardous Materials: Hazardous materials are present in buildings and
structures to be selectively demolished. A report on the presence of
hazardous materials is on file for review and use. Examine report to become
aware of locations where hazardous materials are present.
1.
2.
3.
H.
Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work.
If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb;
immediately notify DIA Project Manager. Hazardous materials will be
removed by Owner under a separate contract.
Hazardous material remediation is specified elsewhere in the Contract
Documents.
Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing
hazardous materials except under procedures specified elsewhere in the
Contract Documents.
Owner will provide material safety data sheets for suspected hazardous
materials that are known to be present in buildings and structures to be
selectively demolished because of building operations or processes
performed there.
Historic Areas: Demolition and hauling equipment and other materials shall be
of sizes that clear surfaces within historic spaces, areas, rooms, and openings,
including temporary protection, by [12 inches (300 mm)]
I.
Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.
J.
Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and
protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.
1.
1.10
Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition
operations.
WARRANTY
A.
Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and
surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with
materials so as not to void existing warranties. Notify warrantor before
proceeding.
B.
Notify warrantor on completion of selective demolition, and obtain
documentation verifying that existing system has been inspected and warranty
remains in effect. Submit documentation at Project closeout.
1.
If possible, retain original installer or fabricator to patch the exposed Work
listed below that is damaged during selective demolition. If it is
impossible to engage the original installer or fabricator, engage another
recognized experienced and specialized firm.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
1.11
A.
Ornamental metal.
Preformed metal panels.
Firestopping.
Terrazzo.
Wall covering.
ProCoat paint finishes.
HVAC enclosures, cabinets or covers.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
Construction waste shall be managed in accordance with provisions of Section
017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal". Documentation
shall be submitted to satisfy the requirements of that Section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
REPAIR MATERIALS
A.
Use repair materials identical to existing materials.
B.
If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces,
use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional
performance of existing materials, as approved by DIA Project Manager.
C.
Use materials whose installed performance equal or surpass that of existing
materials.
D.
Comply with material and installation requirements specified in individual
specification sections.
2.2
PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations
before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal
regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.
C.
LEED Requirements for Building Reuse:
1.
2.
3.
Credit MR 1.1[ and Credit MR 1.2]: Maintain existing building structure
(including structural floor and roof decking) and envelope (exterior skin
and framing, excluding window assemblies and nonstructural roofing
material) not indicated to be demolished; do not demolish such existing
construction beyond indicated limits.
Credit MR 1.3: Maintain existing interior nonstructural elements (interior
walls, doors, floor coverings, and ceiling systems) not indicated to be
demolished; do not demolish such existing construction beyond indicated
limits.
Credit MR 1.2[ and Credit MR 1.3]: Maintain existing nonshell,
nonstructural components (walls, flooring, and ceilings) not indicated to
be demolished; do not demolish such existing construction beyond
indicated limits.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting
selective demolition operations.
B.
Review record documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner
does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in
record documents.
C.
Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to
determine extent of selective demolition required.
D.
Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and
items to be removed and salvaged.
E.
When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict
with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the
nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to DIA Project
Manager.
F.
[Perform] [Engage a professional engineer to perform] an engineering
survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any element
might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of
structure or adjacent structures during selective building demolition operations.
1.
2.
G.
Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of
[measured drawings] [preconstruction photographs] [preconstruction
videotapes] [and] [templates].
1.
2.
3.
3.2
A.
Comply with requirements specified in Section 013233 "Photographic
Documentation."
Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged.
Provide [photographs] [or] [video] of conditions that might be
misconstrued as damage caused by salvage operations.
Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that
will be reproduced or duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of
measurements, materials, and construction details required to make
exact reproduction.
UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to
remain and protect them against damage.
1.
2.
B.
Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from
selective demolition activities.
Steel Tendons: Locate tensioned steel tendons and include
recommendations for de-tensioning.
Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions
specified in Section 011000 "Summary."
Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities
unless authorized in writing by the DIA Project Manager and authorities
having jurisdiction.
Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned:
Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and
mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.
1.
Arrange to shut off indicated utilities and obtain prior written approval with
DIA Project Manager and utility companies.
2.
If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned,
provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective
demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts
of building.
3.
Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing,
and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be
removed.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
C.
3.3
A.
Refrigerant: Remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment to be selectively
demolished according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction.
PREPARATION
Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and
debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets,
walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be
removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible
piping material.
Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug
piping with same or compatible piping material.
Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and
remove equipment.
Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap
services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when
appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational.
Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap
services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner.
Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be
removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible
ductwork material.
Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or
compatible ductwork material.
Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Section
015210 "Temporary Facilities."
Do not close or obstruct roads, streets, walks, walkways, or other
adjacent occupied or used facilities without written authorization from the
DIA Project Manager and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide
alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by
governing regulations.
Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies, and
covered passageways, where required by authorities having jurisdiction.
Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances and landscaping.
Erect a plainly visible fence around drip lines of individual trees or around
perimeter drip lines of groups of trees.
Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection
required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and
facilities to remain.
1.
2.
Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective
demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building.
Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective
demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new
3.
4.
5.
C.
Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural
supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or
collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or
uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.
1.
D.
2.
3.4
A.
Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of
selective demolition.
Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of
existing buildings and construction projects, both in progress and completed,
from exposure, foul weather and other construction operations. Provide
temporary weather tight enclosures for building exteriors.
1.
E.
construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and
interior areas.
Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to
remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations.
Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not
been removed.
Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control,
heating, and cooling specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities
and Controls."
Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosures are not
complete, provide insulated temporary enclosures. Coordinate
enclosure with ventilating and material drying or curing requirements to
avoid dangerous conditions and effects.
Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to existing conditions due
to inadequate temporary enclosures or due to failure of temporary
enclosures.
Temporary Partitions: Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary
enclosures to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes
and noise.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL
General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent
required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to
complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:
1.
2.
Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower
level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier
before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level.
Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions
required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to
remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools
designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to
minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings
to remain.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
Reuse of Building Elements: Project has been designed to result in
end-of-Project rates for reuse of building elements as follows. Do not
demolish building elements beyond what is indicated on Drawings without DIA
Project Manager's approval.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Building Structure and Shell: [75] [100] percent.
Nonshell Elements: 50 percent.
Nonshell Elements: [40] [60] percent.
Removed and Salvaged Items:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to
avoid marring existing finished surfaces.
Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable
materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify
condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting
operations. Maintain[ fire watch and] portable fire-suppression devices
during flame-cutting operations.
Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable
materials and promptly dispose of off-site.
Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method
suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.
Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials
so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or
framing.
Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.[ Comply with
requirements in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management
and Disposal."]
Clean salvaged items.
Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
Store items in a secure area until delivery to DIA.
Transport items to DIA's storage area as designated by the DIA Project
Manager.
Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
Removed and Reinstalled Items:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended
reuse.
Paint equipment to match new equipment, with coatings of equal color,
finish and performance of new equipment.
Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of
containers.
Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation
requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections,
supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional
for use indicated.
E.
3.5
Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against
damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by DIA
Project Manager, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage
location during selective demolition[ and cleaned] and reinstalled in their
original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.
PATCHING AND REPAIRS
A.
General: Promptly repair damage to adjacent construction caused by
selective demolition operations.
B.
Patching: Comply with Specification Section 017330 "Cutting and Patching".
C.
Repairs: Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce
surfaces suitable for new materials.
1.
Completely fill holes and depressions in existing masonry walls that are to
remain with an approved masonry patching material applied according to
manufacturer’s written recommendations.
D.
Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend restoration
into adjoining construction in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching
and refinishing.
E.
Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are demolished extend one
finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new
space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish color, texture and
appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new
materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.
1.
2.
3.
F.
3.6
A.
Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide
materials and comply with installation requirements as specified in other
sections of these specifications.
Where patching occurs on a painted surface, apply primer and
intermediate paint coats over the patch and apply a final paint coat over
the entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional
coats until the patch blends with adjacent surfaces.
Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to
demonstrate integrity of installation.
Ceilings: Patch, repair or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an
even-plane surface of uniform appearance.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS
Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Using power-driven saw, cut concrete
to a depth of at least 3/4 inch (19 mm) at junctures with construction to remain.
Dislodge concrete from reinforcement at perimeter of areas being demolished,
cut reinforcement, and then remove remainder of concrete. Neatly trim
openings to dimensions indicated.
B.
Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with
construction to remain and at regular intervals using power-driven saw, then
remove concrete between saw cuts.
C.
Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with
construction to remain, using power-driven saw, then remove masonry
between saw cuts.
D.
Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then
break up and remove.
E.
Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to
recommendations in RFCI's "Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of
Resilient Floor Coverings."[ Do not use methods requiring solvent-based
adhesive strippers.]
F.
Roofing: Remove no more existing roofing than what can be covered in one
day by new roofing and so that building interior remains watertight and
weathertight.
1.
2.
3.7
A.
Remove existing roof membrane, flashings, copings, and roof
accessories.
Remove existing roofing system down to substrate.
DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
General: Except for items or materials indicated to be[ recycled,] reused,
salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property,
remove demolished materials from Project site[ and legally dispose of them
in an EPA-approved landfill].
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on
adjacent surfaces and areas.
Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other
device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction
Waste Management and Disposal."
Disposal shall be in accordance with Division 32 requirements.
B.
Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
C.
Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally
dispose of them.
3.8
A.
CLEANING
Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by
selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing
before selective demolition operations began.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT
4.1
A.
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
No separate measurement shall be made for work under this Section.
PART 5 - PAYMENT
5.1
A.
METHOD OF PAYMENT
No separate payment will be made for work under this Section. The cost of
the work described in this Section shall be included in the Lump Sum Contract
price.
END OF SECTION 024119
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
078413
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
C.
1.3
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
Include data substantiating that materials comply with requirements.
LEED Submittals:
1.
2.
C.
Section 078446 "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for joints in or between
fire-resistance-rated construction, at exterior curtain-wall/floor intersections, and
in smoke barriers.
Alternates: Refer to Division 01 Section 012300 "Alternates" for description of Work in
this Section affected by alternates.
1.
B.
Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls.
Penetrations in horizontal assemblies.
Penetrations in smoke barriers.
Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For penetration firestopping sealants and
sealant primers, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.
Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4: For penetration firestopping sealants
and sealant primers, documentation indicating that products comply with the
testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services'
"Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various
Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location and
design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
078413-1
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
078413
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
1.
D.
1.4
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and
inspecting agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping condition,
submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration
firestopping manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment
or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly.
Product Samples for each type of product used.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
B.
Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating penetration firestopping has been
installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written
recommendations.
C.
Manufacturer's Certificate.
D.
Certified Test Reports: With product data, submit copies of certified test reports
showing compliance with specified performance values, including r-values (aged
values for plastic insulations), densities, compression strengths, fire performance
characteristics, perm ratings, water absorption ratings and similar properties.
1.
E.
1.5
A.
1.6
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed
by a qualified testing agency, for each type of penetration firestopping,
evidencing full compliance with requirements.
Warranty: Submit copy of installer's warranty.
MAINTENANCE STOCK
Provide minimum two (2) gallons of each type of sealant. Store as directed by DIA
Project Manager.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to FM
Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to
comply with its "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements."
B.
Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing penetration firestopping similar
in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications
include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's
products per specified requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its penetration
firestopping products to Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in
itself confer qualification on buyer.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
078413-2
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
078413
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
C.
Installer Certificate: Engage an Installer who has successfully completed within the
last 3 years at least three (3) sealer applications similar in type and size to that of this
Project and is approved by manufacturer for this type of installation.
D.
Manufacturers Certificate: Not less than five (5) years experience manufacturing
types of product specified.
E.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Penetration firestopping shall comply with the
following requirements:
1.
2.
Penetration firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Penetration firestopping is identical to those tested per testing standard
referenced in "Penetration Firestopping" Article. Provide rated systems
complying with the following requirements:
a.
b.
Penetration firestopping products bear classification marking of qualified
testing and inspecting agency.
Classification markings on penetration firestopping correspond to
designations listed by the following:
1)
2)
3)
UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."
Intertek ETL SEMKO in its "Directory of Listed Building Products."
FM Global in its "Building Materials Approval Guide."
F.
Install all firestopping materials to comply with all applicable authorities and referenced
standards, and comply with requirements of the Denver Building Code.
G.
Warranty: Installer to warrant that the firestopping system will provide a permanent
installation.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping when ambient or
substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping
manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or
other causes.
B.
Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of firestop joint sealers
until all contaminants capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint
substrates.
C.
Install and cure penetration firestopping per manufacturer's written instructions using
natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.
1.8
A.
COORDINATION
Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration
firestopping is installed according to specified requirements.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
078413-3
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
078413
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
B.
Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to
accommodate penetration firestopping.
C.
Notify testing agency at least seven (7) days in advance of penetration firestopping
installations; confirm dates and times on day preceding each series of installations.
D.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
1.
Construction waste shall be managed in accordance with provisions of Section
017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal". Documentation shall
be submitted to satisfy the requirements of that Section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
2.2
A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc.
Grace Construction Products.
Hilti, Inc.
Johns Manville.
Nelson Firestop Products.
NUCO Inc.
Passive Fire Protection Partners.
RectorSeal Corporation.
Specified Technologies Inc.
3M Fire Protection Products.
Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group.
USG Corporation.
<Insert manufacturer's name>.
or approved equal.
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
A.
Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire
according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and
maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration
firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming
openings, and with penetrating items if any.
B.
Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Provide penetration firestopping with
ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive
pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg (2.49 Pa).
1.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
Fire-resistance-rated walls include [fire walls] [fire-barrier walls]
[smoke-barrier walls] [and] [fire partitions].
078413-4
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
078413
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
2.
C.
F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.
Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings
determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure
differential of 0.01-inch wg (2.49 Pa).
1.
2.
3.
D.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
Horizontal assemblies include [floors] [floor/ceiling assemblies] [and] [ceiling
membranes of roof/ceiling assemblies].
F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of
constructions penetrated.
T-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of
constructions penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall.
Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings
determined per UL 1479.
1.
L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. (0.025 cu. m/s per sq. m) of penetration
opening at 0.30-inch wg (74.7 Pa) at both ambient and elevated temperatures.
E.
W-Rating: Provide penetration firestopping showing no evidence of water leakage
when tested according to UL 1479.
F.
Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and
smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per
ASTM E 84.
G.
VOC Content: Penetration firestopping sealants and sealant primers shall comply
with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,
Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
1.
2.
3.
Sealants: 250 g/L.
Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
H.
Low-Emitting Materials: Penetration firestopping sealants and sealant primers shall
comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of
Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from
Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
I.
Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are
needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those
components specified by penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by
qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestopping indicated.
1.
Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following:
a.
b.
c.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
Slag-wool-fiber or rock-wool-fiber insulation.
Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing
materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state.
Fire-rated form board.
078413-5
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
078413
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.3
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
Fillers for sealants.
Temporary forming materials.
Substrate primers.
Collars.
Steel sleeves.
FILL MATERIALS
A.
Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place
concrete floors and consisting of an outer metallic sleeve lined with an intumescent
strip, a radial extended flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to
concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket.
B.
Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after
cure during exposure to moisture.
C.
Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined
with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.
D.
Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced
elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized-steel sheet.
E.
Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no
solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds.
F.
Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with
aluminum foil on one side.
G.
Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic
cement, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project
site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar.
H.
Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth
cases filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and
fire-retardant additives. Where exposed, cover openings with steel-reinforcing wire
mesh to protect pillows/bags from being easily removed.
I.
Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed,
expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.
J.
Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric
sealants of grade indicated below:
1.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other
horizontal surfaces, and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and sloped
surfaces, unless indicated firestopping limits use of nonsag grade for both
opening conditions.
078413-6
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
078413
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
2.4
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
FIRESTOPPING INSULATING MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide insulating materials which comply with requirements indicated for
materials, compliance with referenced standards, and other characteristics.
B.
Semi-Refractory Fiber Board Safing Insulation: Semi-rigid boards designed for use as
a firestop at openings between edge of slab and exterior wall panels at tops of rated
walls and as shown, produced by combining semi-refractory mineral fiber
manufactured from slag with thermosetting resin binders to comply with ASTM C 612,
Class 1 and 2; nominal density of 4.0 lbs. per cu. ft.; passing ASTM E 136 for
combustion characteristics; r-value of 4.0 at 75 deg. F (23.9 deg. C), meeting point
exceeding 2000 deg. F. Supports to be 26 gauge galvanized steel.
C.
Manufacturers of Semi-Refractory Fiber Insulation:
1.
2.
2.5
A.
United States Gypsum Co.
or approved equal.
MIXING
For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration
firestopping manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials,
water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing
containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of
uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels
informing about manufacturer, product name and designation, expiration period for
use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.
B.
Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturers' recommendations to
prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures,
contaminants, or other causes.
C.
General Protection: Protect insulations from physical damage and from becoming
wet, soiled, or covered with ice or snow. Comply with manufacturer's
recommendations for handling, storage and protection during installation.
3.2
A.
EXAMINATION
Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other
conditions affecting performance of the Work.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
078413-7
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
078413
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
B.
3.3
A.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing penetration
firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following
requirements:
1.
2.
3.
Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign
materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping.
Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound
surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping.
Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.
Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
B.
Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that
manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of
bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.
C.
Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent penetration firestopping from contacting
adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that would
otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods
used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing
firestopping's seal with substrates.
3.4
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written
installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications
indicated.
B.
Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill
materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional
shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.
1.
C.
After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible
forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components
of firestopping.
Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following
results:
1.
2.
3.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and
penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.
Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings
and penetrating items.
For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to
produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
078413-8
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
078413
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
D.
At full height fire rated walls: Install firesafing insulation as shown on the drawings at
wall head condition and as required to meet Denver Building Code requirements.
E.
Protect all fire safing insulation by installing 22 gage galvanized sheet metal closure
at top and bottom, which complies with the DBC for protection of fire safing insulation.
F.
Tool exposed surfaces of mortar or sealants.
G.
At plastic pipes penetrating floors provide a gauge galvanized steel sleeve around
pipes, fire stop sealant within sleeve.
H.
At opening between exterior walls and floors/roofs install firesafing insulation per DBC
requirements and in accordance with AAMA Tir-A3
3.5
A.
IDENTIFICATION
Identify penetration firestopping with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels
permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches (150 mm) of firestopping edge
so labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping.
Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of
permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the
following information on labels:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.6
A.
The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building
Management of Any Damage."
Contractor's name, address, and phone number.
Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
Date of installation.
Manufacturer's name.
Installer's name.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
<Contractor> will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping is damaged or removed
because of testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping to comply with
requirements.
C.
Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping with other construction only after
inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.
3.7
A.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by
methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration
firestopping manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
078413-9
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
078413
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
B.
3.8
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that
ensure that penetration firestopping is without damage or deterioration at time of
Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs,
immediately cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping and
install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements.
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SCHEDULE
A.
Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to system numbers in UL's "Fire
Resistance Directory" under product Category XHEZ.
B.
Where Intertek ETL SEMKO-listed systems are indicated, they refer to design
numbers in Intertek ETL SEMKO's "Directory of Listed Building Products" under
"Firestop Systems."
C.
Where FM Global-approved systems are indicated, they refer to design numbers listed
in FM Global's "Building Materials Approval Guide" under "Wall and Floor Penetration
Fire Stops."
D.
Firestopping with No Penetrating Items[ FS-<#>]:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
E.
Firestopping for Metallic Pipes, Conduit, or Tubing[ FS-<#>]:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
F.
UL-Classified Systems: [C-AJ-] [C-BJ-] [F-A-] [F-B-] [F-C-] [W-J-] [W-L-]
Intertek ETL SEMKO-Listed Systems:
FM Global-Approved Systems:
F-Rating: [2 hours]
T-Rating: [2 hours] L-Rating at Ambient: Less than cfm/sq. ft. (cu. m/s per sq.
m)>.
L-Rating at 400 deg F (204 deg C): Less than cfm/sq. ft. (cu. m/s per sq. m)>.
W-Rating: No leakage of water at completion of water leakage testing.
Type of Fill Materials: [As required to achieve rating]
UL-Classified Systems: [C-AJ-] [C-BJ-] [C-BK-] [F-A-] [F-B-] [F-C-] [F-E-] [W-J-]
[W-K-] [W-L-] [W-N-]
Intertek ETL SEMKO-Listed Systems:
FM Global-Approved Systems:
F-Rating: [2 hours]
T-Rating: [2 hours] <Insert number of hours>.
L-Rating at Ambient: Less than cfm/sq. ft. (cu. m/s per sq. m)>.
L-Rating at 400 deg F (204 deg C): Less than cfm/sq. ft. (cu. m/s per sq. m)>.
W-Rating: No leakage of water at completion of water leakage testing.
Type of Fill Materials: [As required to achieve rating]
Firestopping for Nonmetallic Pipe, Conduit, or Tubing[ FS-<#>]:
1.
2.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
UL-Classified Systems: [C-AJ-] [C-BJ-] [C-BK-] [F-A-] [F-B-] [F-C-] [F-E-] [W-J-]
[W-K-] [W-L-] [W-N-]
Intertek ETL SEMKO-Listed Systems: FM Global-Approved Systems:
078413-10
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
078413
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
G.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
UL-Classified Systems: [C-AJ-] [C-BJ-] [F-A-] [F-B-] [F-C-] [W-J-] [W-K-] [W-L-]
Intertek ETL SEMKO-Listed Systems:
FM Global-Approved Systems:
F-Rating: [1 hour] [2 hours]
T-Rating: [1 hour] [2 hours]
L-Rating at Ambient: Less than cfm/sq. ft. (cu. m/s per sq. m)>.
L-Rating at 400 deg F (204 deg C): Less than cfm/sq. ft. (cu. m/s per sq. m)>.
W-Rating: No leakage of water at completion of water leakage testing.
Type of Fill Materials: [As required to achieve rating]
Firestopping for Insulated Pipes[ FS-<#>]:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
J.
UL-Classified Systems: [C-AJ-] [C-BJ-] [C-BK-] [F-A-] [F-B-] [F-C-] [F-E-] [W-J-]
[W-K-] [W-L-]
Intertek ETL SEMKO-Listed Systems:
FM Global-Approved Systems:
F-Rating: [1 hour] [2 hours]
T-Rating: [1 hour] [2 hours] L-Rating at Ambient: Less than cfm/sq. ft. (cu.
m/s per sq. m)>.
L-Rating at 400 deg F (204 deg C): Less than cfm/sq. ft. (cu. m/s per sq. m)>.
W-Rating: No leakage of water at completion of water leakage testing.
Type of Fill Materials: [As required to achieve rating]
Firestopping for Cable Trays with Electric Cables[ FS-<#>]:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
I.
F-Rating: [2 hours]
T-Rating: [2 hours]
L-Rating at Ambient: Less than cfm/sq. ft. (cu. m/s per sq. m)>.
L-Rating at 400 deg F (204 deg C): Less than cfm/sq. ft. (cu. m/s per sq. m)>.
W-Rating: No leakage of water at completion of water leakage testing.
Type of Fill Materials: [As required to achieve rating]
Firestopping for Electrical Cables[ FS-<#>]:
1.
H.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
UL-Classified Systems: [C-AJ-] [C-BJ-] [C-BK-] [F-A-] [F-B-] [F-C-] [F-E-] [W-J-]
[W-L-] [W-N-]
Intertek ETL SEMKO-Listed Systems:
FM Global-Approved Systems:
F-Rating: [1 hour] [2 hours]
T-Rating: [1 hour] [2 hours]
L-Rating at Ambient: Less than cfm/sq. ft. (cu. m/s per sq. m)>.
L-Rating at 400 deg F (204 deg C): Less than cfm/sq. ft. (cu. m/s per sq. m)>.
W-Rating: No leakage of water at completion of water leakage testing.
Type of Fill Materials: [As required to achieve rating]
Firestopping for Miscellaneous Electrical Penetrants[ FS-<#>]:
1.
2.
3.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
UL-Classified Systems: [C-AJ-] [C-BJ-] [F-A-] [W-L-] [W-J-]
Intertek ETL SEMKO-Listed Systems:
FM Global-Approved Systems:
078413-11
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
078413
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
K.
F-Rating: [1 hour] [2 hours]
T-Rating: [1 hour] [2 hours]
L-Rating at Ambient: Less than cfm/sq. ft. (cu. m/s per sq. m)>.
L-Rating at 400 deg F (204 deg C): Less than cfm/sq. ft. (cu. m/s per sq. m)>.
W-Rating: No leakage of water at completion of water leakage testing.
Type of Fill Materials: [As required to achieve rating]
Firestopping for Miscellaneous Mechanical Penetrants[ FS-<#>]:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
L.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
UL-Classified Systems: [C-AJ-] [C-BJ-] [F-A-] [F-B-] [F-C-] [F-E-] [W-J-] [W-L-]
[W-N-]
Intertek ETL SEMKO-Listed Systems:
FM Global-Approved Systems
F-Rating: [1 hour] [2 hours]
T-Rating: [1 hour] [2 hours]
L-Rating at Ambient: Less cfm/sq. ft. (cu. m/s per sq. m)>.
L-Rating at 400 deg F (204 deg C): Less than cfm/sq. ft. (cu. m/s per sq. m)>.
W-Rating: No leakage of water at completion of water leakage testing.
Type of Fill Materials: [As required to achieve rating]
Firestopping for Groupings of Penetrants[ FS-<#>]:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
UL-Classified Systems: [C-AJ-] [C-BJ-] [F-A-] [F-B-] [F-C-] [F-E-] [W-J-] [W-L-]
Intertek ETL SEMKO-Listed Systems:
FM Global-Approved Systems:
F-Rating: [1 hour] [2 hours
T-Rating: [1 hour] [2 hours]
L-Rating at Ambient: Less than cfm/sq. ft. (cu. m/s per sq. m)>.
L-Rating at 400 deg F (204 deg C): Less than cfm/sq. ft. (cu. m/s per sq. m)>.
W-Rating: No leakage of water at completion of water leakage testing.
Type of Fill Materials: [As required to achieve rating]
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT
4.1
A.
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
No separate measurement will be made for work under this Section.
PART 5 - PAYMENT
5.1
A.
METHOD OF PAYMENT
No separate payment will be made for work under this Section. The cost of the work
described in this Section shall be included in the lump sum contract price.
END OF SECTION 078413
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
078413-12
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
078413
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
078413-13
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260400
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
SECTION 260400 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Certain labor, materials, and equipment may be furnished under other Sections of
these specifications, by utility Companies or by the Owner. When this is the case, the
extent, source and description of these items will be as indicated on the drawings or as
described in the specifications.
B.
Where a panel is installed, at least 25% of panel capacity, accounting for serving panel
capacity, shall remain as spare capacity after project completion.
C.
Where existing panels are used for additional work, when six (6) or less spaces remain
a new panel shall be installed.
D.
All electrical/electronic circuits, including audio, video and fire alarm systems, shall be
in an approved raceway system. No “wild circuits” will be accepted.
E.
The Designer of Record shall not design or specify and the Contractor shall not install
rigid metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing, flexible steel conduit, liquid-tight flexible
steel conduit, non-metallic rigid conduit or innerduct in any horizontal or vertical
concrete wall or slab structures or portions thereof, e.g., cast-in-place concrete floor
slab on steel decking; cast-in-place concrete slabs integral with concrete structural
support systems; prestressed concrete slabs; post-tensioned concrete slabs; precast
concrete construction with or without field applied or plant fabricated concrete topping
slabs, slabs on grade, foundation walls or in concrete cast-in-place walls, etc.
F.
Related Sections:
1.
Basic Electrical Requirements specifically applicable to all Division 26 Sections,
in addition to Division 1 General Requirements, and Divisions 11, 14, 21, 22, 23,
27 and 28.
2.
All electrical/electronic circuits and equipment from any other Division shall meet
the requirements of Division 26.
3.
Description: Work shall consist of furnishing all labor, equipment, supplies, and
materials, unless otherwise specified, necessary for the installation of complete
electrical systems as required by the specifications and as shown on the
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
260400-1
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260400
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
drawings, subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract. The Work shall
also include the completion of those details of electrical work not mentioned or
shown which are necessary for the successful operation of all electrical systems.
4.
Temporary Power: See Division 1 for construction power constraints.
G.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
H.
Comply with the requirements of the reference standards noted herein, except where
more stringent requirements are listed herein or otherwise required by the Contract
Documents.
I.
Latest editions of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
1.3
ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (as adopted and amended by the
Denver Building Department).
International Fire Code (as amended by the Denver Fire Department).
International Building Code (as adopted and amended by the Denver Building
Department).
International Energy Conservation Code (as adopted and amended by the
Denver Building Department).
ANSI/IEEE C2 - National Electrical Safety Code.
OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Administration, as Amended
Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL).
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
Other references as listed elsewhere in these specifications.
IEEE Standard 519- Recommended Practices and Requirement for Harmonic
Control in Electrical Power Systems.
DEFINITIONS
A.
"Furnish" or "Provide": To supply, install and connect complete and ready for safe and
regular operation of particular work unless specifically otherwise noted.
B.
"Install": To erect, mount and connect complete with related accessories.
C.
"Supply": To purchase, procure, acquire and deliver complete with related accessories.
D.
"Work": Labor, materials, equipment, apparatus, controls, accessories, and other items
required for proper and complete installation.
E.
"Wiring": Raceway, fittings, wire, boxes and related items.
F.
"Concealed": Embedded in masonry, concrete or other construction, installed in furred
spaces, within double partitions or hung ceilings, in trenches, in crawl spaces, or in
enclosures.
G.
“Or Equal. Or Approved Equal”: Refers to products that, in the opinion of the DIA
Project Manager, are similar in all respect to products specified by proprietary brand
name. (Refer to Section 01630 for procedures for submittal of proposed substitutions.)
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
260400-2
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260400
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
H.
"Exposed": Not installed underground or "concealed" as defined above.
I.
"Indicated," "Shown" or "Noted": As indicated, shown or noted on drawings or
specifications.
J.
"Similar" or "Equal": Same in materials, weight, size, design, construction, capacity,
performance, and efficiency of specified product.
K.
"Reviewed," "Satisfactory," "Accepted," or "Directed": As reviewed, satisfactory,
accepted, or directed by or to DIA Project Manager.
L.
"Related Work" includes all "Work" required for a complete working system.
M.
"Equipment": A general term including material, fittings, devices, appliances, fixtures,
apparatus, and the like used as a part of, or in connection with, an electrical
installation.
N.
"Busbar": A rigid metallic conductor, lug or bar used to make a common connection
between more than one circuit. (Includes all termination assemblies.)
O.
"Shall": Mandatory requirements of this specification are characterized by the use of
the word "shall".
P.
Refer to Article 100 of the currently adopted National Electrical Code for other
definitions as applicable to this Project.
1.4
A.
1.5
WORK SEQUENCE
Construct Work in sequence under provisions of Division 1 where applicable.
DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A.
The Drawings indicate the general arrangement of circuits, outlets, panelboards and
other work. Information shown on the Drawings is schematic; however, re-circuiting will
not be permitted without specific acceptance. In cases of conflict between
specifications and drawings, the specification shall have precedence. Data presented
on the drawings is as accurate as planning can determine, but accuracy is not
guaranteed and field verification of all dimensions, locations, levels, etc., to suit field
conditions is required. Review all of the Contract Documents and adjust all work to
conform to all conditions shown therein.
B.
Prior to submitting a bid, a site visit is required to ascertain all conditions affecting the
proposed installation and to adjust all work accordingly. Costs for providing for these
adjustments, including response to site constraints, shall be itemized and listed in the
bid proposal.
C.
Discrepancies between different plans, between plans and specifications, between
specifications, or regulations and codes governing this installation shall be brought to
the attention of the DIA Project Manager in writing 72 hours before the date of bid
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
260400-3
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260400
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
opening. In the event such discrepancies exist, and the DIA Project Manager is not so
notified, the adjudication of responsibility shall be solely at the discretion of the DIA
Project Manager.
1.6
COORDINATION
A.
Prior to fabrication or installation of any electrical work, participate in detailed
coordination planning meetings with all other building utilities system trades, under the
direction of the General Contractor, so as to completely establish routings, elevations,
space requirements, and coordination of access, layout, and suspension requirements
in relationship to the building structure and the work of all other trades.
B.
Any electrical work penetrating concrete walls or floors shall require saw cutting and/or
core drilling and shall require approval by the DIA Project Manager. The Contractor
shall perform all necessary imaging (x-rays, etc.) as specified, and submit shop
drawings of any saw cutting or core drilling to the DIA Project Manager prior to
performing the Work. Refer to Section 017330 "Cutting and Patching" for additional
requirements.
C.
Any power outages necessary to install or test electrical systems and/or equipment
shall be coordinated with Denver International Airport Maintenance/Engineering. A
written shutdown request form shall be submitted to and approved by the DIA Project
Manager two (2) weeks prior to the shutdown.
1.7
COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A.
Where the Contractor modifies the design, through selection of equipment differing
from that shown, coordination drawings shall be provided by the Contractor in
accordance with Division 1 to a scale of 1/4"=1'0" or larger for equipment rooms,
details, congested areas and sections; other plans at a scale of 1/8"=1'0". These
drawings are to detail major elements, components, and systems of electrical
equipment and materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and building
components.
B.
Coordination drawings shall be in accordance with current DIA standards for format,
and as outlined in Division 1.
C.
The Contractor shall indicate locations where space is limited for installation and
access and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to
the efficient flow of the Work, including (but not necessarily limited to) the following:
1.
Indicate the proposed locations of raceway systems, equipment, and materials.
Include the following:
a.
b.
c.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
Clearances for servicing equipment, including space for equipment
disassembly required for periodic maintenance.
Exterior wall and foundation penetrations.
Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations.
260400-4
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260400
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
d.
e.
f.
2.
3.
1.8
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
Equipment connections and support details.
Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases.
Support details.
Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment
into the building during construction.
Floor plans, elevations, and appropriate details are required to indicate
penetrations in floors, walls, and ceilings and their relationship to other
penetrations and installations.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Refer to Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures".
B.
Submit shop drawings, coordination drawings and product data in accordance with
provisions of Division 1. Submit all required information under a given specification
section together. Do not split out submittals under the same specification section.
C.
Prior to submission, shop drawings, material lists and catalog cut sheets or
manufacturer's printed data shall be thoroughly checked for compliance with Contract
requirements, compatibility with equipment being furnished by the Contractor or
Owner, accuracy of dimensions, coordination with work of other trades, and
conformance with sound and safe practice as to erection of installation. Each submittal
shall bear Contractor's signed statement evidencing such checking.
D.
Clearly mark each shop drawing as follows for purposes of identification:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Shop Drawing.
Equipment Identification Used on Contract Drawings.
Date.
Name of Project.
Branch of Work.
Project Manager's Name.
Contractor's Name.
E.
Clearly mark printed material, catalog cut sheets, pamphlets or specification sheets,
and shop drawings with the same designation shown on the Contract document
schedules. Contractor agrees that submittals processed by the DIA Project Manager
are not change orders; that the purpose of submittals is to demonstrate to the DIA
Project Manager that the Contractor understands the design concept; and that the
Contractor demonstrates this understanding by indicating which equipment and
material the Contractor intends to furnish and install and by detailing the installation
methods the Contractor intends to use.
F.
Contractor shall be responsible for dimensions (which the Contractor shall confirm and
correlate at the job site), fabrication processes and techniques of construction, and
coordination of the Contractor's Work with that of other trades. The Contractor shall
check and verify all measurements and review shop drawings before submitting them.
If any deviations from the specified requirements for any item of material or equipment
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
260400-5
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260400
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
exist, such deviation shall be expressly stated in writing and incorporated with the
submittal.
G.
Maintain one copy of accepted shop drawings at the Project field office until
completion of the Project, and make this copy available, upon request, to
representatives of the DIA Project Manager and Owner.
H.
No equipment or materials shall be installed or stored at the jobsite until submittals for
such equipment or materials have been given review action by the DIA Project
Manager accepting their use.
I.
Shop drawings and manufacturer's published data shall be submitted for all equipment
required for this Project.
1.9
A.
RECORD DOCUMENTS
Maintain a Contract set of electrical drawings and specifications at the site. Neatly
mark all changes, discoveries and deviations from the original drawings. Use a
reproducible color that contrasts with the prints. This shall be a separate set of
drawings, not used for construction purposes, and shall be updated daily as the job
progresses and shall be made available for inspection by the DIA Project Manager at
all times. Upon completion of the Contract, this set of record drawings shall be
delivered to the DIA Project Manager. Follow current DIA BIM standards, to be
furnished to the successful bidder as well as the project-specific BIM execution plan.
Record documents to be provided by the Contractor shall clearly and accurately show
the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.10
Provide horizontal and vertical dimensions for all raceway systems, size and
location, for both exterior and interior; locations of control devices; distribution
and branch electrical circuitry; and fuse and circuit breaker size and
arrangements.
Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent
building lines.
Approved substitutions, Contract Modifications, and actual equipment and
materials installed.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Obtain all permits, plan review, and inspections from authority having jurisdiction.
B.
The drawings and specifications take precedence when they are more stringent than
codes, statutes, or ordinances in effect. Applicable codes, ordinances, standards and
statutes take precedence when they are more stringent than the drawings and
specifications.
1.11
A.
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
The equipment shall be designed and constructed to operate successfully at the rated
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
260400-6
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260400
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
values under the following environmental conditions:
1.
2.
3.
1.12
A.
Location: Indoors/Outdoors.
Altitude: 5,500 feet above sea level.
Temperature range: -30ºF to 120ºF.
WARRANTY
The entire electrical system installed under this Contract shall be left in proper working
order. Replace, at no additional cost to the Owner, any work, materials, or equipment
which evidences defects in design, construction, or workmanship within two (2) years,
or any longer period specifically noted elsewhere in these specifications, from date of
final acceptance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A.
Materials and Equipment: Acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction as suitable for
the use intended, except where more stringent requirements are indicated by the
Contract Documents.
B.
All equipment and materials installed shall be new, unless otherwise specified.
C.
Defective or damaged materials shall be replaced or repaired, prior to final
acceptance, in a manner acceptable to the DIA Project Manager or Owner and at no
additional cost to the Owner.
D.
All electrical "equipment" and assemblies shall be acceptable for installation only if
labeled and listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory, such as UL or an
equivalent.
E.
All major equipment components shall have the manufacturer's name, address, model
number, and serial number permanently attached in a conspicuous location.
2.2
STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A.
Store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels
intact and legible. Store sensitive products in weather-tight enclosures; maintain within
temperature and humidity ranges required by manufacturer's instructions.
B.
For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground.
Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering and provide
ventilation to avoid condensation.
C.
Arrange storage to provide access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure
products are undamaged and are maintained under required conditions.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
260400-7
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260400
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.3
A.
PRODUCT OPTIONS
Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only:
1.
B.
A.
2.5
A.
Any product meeting those standards.
Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for
Substitutions:
1.
2.4
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not specifically named
with supporting documentation for approval by DIA Project Manager.
PRODUCTS LIST
Within fifteen (15) days after date of Notice to Proceed, submit complete list of major
products required for submittal under these specifications, with name of manufacturer,
trade name, and model number of each product.
SUBSTITUTIONS
Refer to Division 1 General Requirements, Section 012510 "Substitutions".
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
WORKMANSHIP
A.
Only quality workmanship will be accepted. Poor workmanship, improper layout of
work and lack of coordination of Work, as determined by the DIA Project Manager, are
not acceptable and shall be corrected at the contractors cost.
B.
Contractor shall include no more than one apprentice per Journeyman Electrician.
Apprentices shall be under the direct supervision of a licensed electrician at all times.
C.
Any changes or deviations from the drawings and specifications must be accepted in
writing by the DIA Project Manager. All errors in installation shall be corrected at the
expense of the Contractor. All specialties shall be installed as detailed on the
drawings. Where details or specific installation requirements are not provided,
manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed.
D.
Upon completion of Work, all equipment and materials shall be installed complete,
thoroughly tested, checked, correctly adjusted, and left ready for intended use or
operation. All Work shall be thoroughly cleaned and all residues shall be removed from
surfaces. Exterior surfaces of all material and equipment shall be left in a perfect,
unblemished condition.
E.
Contractor shall provide a complete installation, including all required labor, material,
cartage, testing, insurance, permits, and taxes.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
260400-8
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260400
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.2
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
CHASES, OPENINGS, CUTTING AND PATCHING
A.
Carefully lay out all work in advance so as to eliminate where possible, cutting,
channeling, chasing, or drilling of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings and roofs. Any
damage to the building, structure, piping, ducts, equipment or any defaced finish shall
be repaired by skilled mechanics of the trades involved at no additional cost to the
Owner and to the satisfaction of the DIA Project Manager. Any necessary cutting,
channeling, drilling or welding as required for the proper support, concealment,
installation or anchoring of raceways, outlets, or other electrical equipment shall be
performed in a careful manner, and shall be pre-approved by the DIA Project Manager.
B.
All openings made in fire-rated walls, floors, or ceilings shall be sealed and made tight
in a manner to conform to the fire rating for the barrier penetrated. Reference
specification Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for additional information.
C.
All penetrations required through completed concrete construction shall be core drilled
at minimum size required. All penetrations in concrete require an x-ray or ground
penetrating radar to determine if the location is clear of reinforcing steel and
embedded systems. Precautions shall be taken when drilling to prevent damage to
structural concrete.
3.3
A.
3.4
A.
3.5
A.
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
Coordinate electrical systems, equipment, and material installation with other building
components. If the Contractor furnishes equipment of a different size, the Contractor
shall furnish and install the proper fuses, circuit breaker, disconnect switch, wire and
conduit required for the equipment furnished, at no additional cost to the Owner, and
as deemed acceptable by the DIA Project Manager.
PROGRESS OF WORK
Coordinate the progress of electrical work to conform to the progress of the Work of
the other trades. Complete the entire installation as soon as the condition of the sites
will permit. Any cost resulting from defective or ill-timed work performed under Division
26 shall be borne by the Contractor.
ELECTRICAL COMPLETION
Training of Operating and Maintenance Personnel: Furnish the services of a qualified
representative of the supplier of each item or system itemized below who shall instruct
specific personnel, as designated by the Owner, in the operation and maintenance of
that item or system.
1.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
Instruction shall be given when the particular system is complete, shall be of the
number of hours indicated, and at the time requested by the Owner. A
representative of the Contractor shall be present for all demonstrations.
260400-9
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260400
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
B.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
Operating and Maintenance Manuals and Parts Lists: Deliver three (3) complete
operating & maintenance manuals and parts lists in three-ring binders to the Owner at
the time of the above required training. The information shall be provided on the
manufacturer’s original data sheets. Fully explain the contents of the manuals as part
of required training and instruct the Owner's personnel in the correct procedure in
obtaining service, both during and after the guarantee period.
1.
The operating and maintenance manuals and parts lists shall give complete
information as to whom the Owner shall contact for service and parts. Include
address and phone number. Furnish evidence that an authorized service
organization regularly carries a complete stock of repair parts for these items (or
systems), and that the organization is available for service. Service shall be
furnished within 24 hours after requested.
C.
Operating and Acceptance Tests: Provide all labor, instruments, and equipment for the
performance of tests as specified below and elsewhere in these specifications for all
applicable equipment furnished and installed as part of this Contract. Submit three (3)
copies of test reports to the DIA Project Manager for the DIA Project Manager's
approval.
D.
Clean Up: Remove all materials, scrap, etc., relative to the electrical installation, and
leave the premises and all equipment, lamps, fixtures, etc. in a clean, orderly
condition. Clean all electrical equipment, such as switchboards, panel boards,
luminaries etc. of construction dirt, dust, etc. and touch-up or repaint all scratches,
blemishes, rust spots etc. to its original condition. Any costs to the Owner for cleanup
of the site will be charged against the Contractor.
E.
Acceptance Demonstration: Upon completion of the Work, at a time to be designated
by the DIA Project Manager, the Contractor shall demonstrate for the Owner the
operation of the entire installation, including all systems provided or modified under
this Contract.
F.
Final Acceptance by the Owner will not occur until all operating instructions are
received and Owner's personnel have been thoroughly indoctrinated in the
maintenance and operation of all equipment, as approved by DIA Project Manager.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT
4.1
A.
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
No separate measurement shall be made for work under this Section.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
260400-10
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260400
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
PART 5 - PAYMENT
5.1
A.
METHOD OF PAYMENT
No separate payment will be made for work under this Section. The cost of the work
described in this Section shall be included in the Lump Sum Contract price.
END OF SECTION 260400
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
260400-11
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260519
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
C.
1.3
Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less.
Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.
Division 26 Section "Medium-Voltage Cables" for single-conductor and
multiconductor cables, cable splices, and terminations for electrical distribution
systems with 2001 to 35,000 V.
Division 26 Section "Undercarpet Electrical Power Cables" for flat cables for
undercarpet installations.
Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for cabling used for
voice and data circuits.
Alternates: Refer to Division 01 Section 012300 "Alternates" for description of Work in
this Section affected by Alternates.
DEFINITIONS
A.
EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
B.
NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
1.4
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
Include data substantiating that materials comply with requirements.
REVISION NO 00
260519-1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260519
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
1.5
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For testing agency.
B.
Field quality-control test reports.
1.6
A.
1.7
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
As-Built Plans: Submit complete as-built plans of all Work, including interface with
other Work, in accordance with requirements as specified in Section 013300
"Submittal Procedures".
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
1.8
A.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
Construction waste shall be managed in accordance with provisions of Section 017419
"Construction Waste Management and Disposal". Documentation shall be submitted to
satisfy the requirements of that Section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company.
General Cable Corporation.
Southwire Company.
Encore Wire Corp.
Cerro Wire and Cable Company.
CME Wire.
Coleman Cable Inc.
or approved equal.
B.
All conductors shall be copper.
C.
AC cable and Modular wiring are not permitted.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
REVISION NO 00
260519-2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260519
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
D.
MC Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70. Provide internal equipment grounding
conductor throughout.
E.
Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70.
F.
Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types [THW] [THHN-THWN]
[XHHW].
G.
Remote Control and Signal Cable
1.
2.
2.2
A.
CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Control Cable for Class 1 Remote Control and Signal Circuits: Copper conductor,
600 volt insulation, rated at 60 deg C, individual conductors twisted together,
shielded, and covered with a PVC jacket.
Control Cable for Class 2 or Class 3 Remote Control and Signal Circuits: Copper
conductor, individual conductors twisted together, shielded, and covered with a
PVC jacket; UL listed.
AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.
O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC.
3M; Electrical Products Division.
Tyco Electronics Corp.
Ideal.
or approved equal.
Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating,
material, type, and class for application and service indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS
A.
Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 12 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 10 AWG and
larger.
B.
Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 12 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 10 AWG
and larger, except for connection to vibrating equipment then stranded shall be used.
C.
Prohibited Cable Types: UF, NM, SE, AC.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
REVISION NO 00
260519-3
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260519
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
3.2
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND
WIRING METHODS
A.
Minimum wire size shall be based on the over current protection device and as
governed by the NEC.
B.
Service Entrance: [Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway] [Type
XHHW, single conductors in raceway].
C.
Exposed Feeders: [Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway], [Type
XHHW, single conductors in raceway].
D.
Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: [Type
THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway], [Type XHHW, single conductors in
raceway].
E.
Feeders below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: [Type THHN-THWN, single
conductors in raceway], [Type XHHW, single conductors in raceway].
F.
Feeders Installed below Raised Flooring: [Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in
raceway], [Type XHHW, single conductors in raceway].
G.
Feeders in Cable Tray: [Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway], [Type
XHHW, single conductors in raceway].
H.
Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: [Type THHN-THWN, single
conductors in raceway].
I.
Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: [Type THHN-THWN,
single conductors in raceway].
J.
Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground:
[Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway].
K.
Branch Circuits Installed below Raised Flooring: [Type THHN-THWN, single
conductors in raceway].
L.
Branch Circuits in Cable Tray: [Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway].
M.
Class 1 Remote Control and Signal Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway or cable
tray as applicable, or Copper conductor, 600 volt insulation, individual conductors
twisted together, shielded, and covered with a PVC jacket.
N.
Class 2 Remote Control and Signal Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway or cable
tray as applicable, or Copper conductor, individual conductors twisted together,
shielded, and covered with a PVC jacket; UL listed.
O.
All power, control, data, communication and signal wire or cable shall be installed in an
approved raceway.
P.
MC Cable allowed for use in 20-Ampere branch circuits, with the following conditions:
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
REVISION NO 00
260519-4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260519
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
1.
2.
3.
3.3
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
Cable shall be run concealed in all locations. Where circuiting must be exposed,
provide single conductor building wire in approved raceway.
Home run from first device to panel board shall be single conductor building wire
in approved raceway.
MC cable shall be supported using approved methods throughout. Do not run
cables unsupported in any area, including above accessible ceilings, in
unfinished areas, etc.
INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A.
All power, control, data, communication and signal wire or cable shall be installed in an
approved raceway (raceway shall be defined as conduit or cable tray as applicable).
B.
Verify raceways are open, continuous and clear of debris before installing cables.
C.
Pull all conductors into a raceway at the same time. Use a listed wire pulling lubricant
for pulling No. 4 AWG and larger wires.
D.
Completely and thoroughly swab raceway system before installing conductors for
conduit in floors, concrete, or below grade.
E.
Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary;
compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed
manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
F.
Install wire in raceway after interior of building has been physically protected from the
weather and all mechanical work likely to injure conductors has been completed.
G.
Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable
grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.
H.
Pulling winches and other necessary pulling equipment shall be of adequate capacity
to ensure a continuous pull on the cable. Strain gages shall be used to monitor the
cable pulling tension.
I.
Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural
members, and follow surface contours where possible.
J.
Neatly train wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panel boards. Make temporary
connections to panel board devices with sufficient slack conductor to facilitate
reconnections required for balancing loads between phases.
K.
Support cables according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical
Systems."
L.
Complete cable tray systems installation according to Section 260536 "Cable Trays for
Electrical Systems" prior to installing conductors and cables.
M.
Conductors shall not be pulled in concrete encased conduits before concrete is placed.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
REVISION NO 00
260519-5
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260519
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
N.
For connection to vibrating equipment, stranded wire shall be used.
O.
All wiring shall be installed in a new approved raceway system. Existing conduits shall
not be used unless approved by the DIA Project Manager.
P.
Where harmonic currents exist on feeders that supply panelboards that serve
electronic equipment of 40 percent or more of the panelboards total ampacity, two (2)
full size neutral conductors or a neutral conductor rated at 200 percent shall be
provided to the panelboard being served. A neutral bus bar rated at 200 percent shall
also be provided in the panelboard.
Q.
Shared Neutrals: Prohibited. A full-size neutral conductor shall be provided for each
single-phase circuit.
3.4
CONNECTIONS
A.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
B.
Splice only in accessible junction and outlet boxes.
C.
Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess
equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced
conductors.
D.
Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least [12 inches (300 mm)]
of slack.
3.5
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
B.
Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other
end of conductor, and identify as spare conductor.
3.6
A.
3.7
A.
SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies.
Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for
Electrical Raceways and Cabling."
FIRESTOPPING
Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to
restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Division 07 Section
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
REVISION NO 00
260519-6
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260519
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
"Penetration Firestopping."
3.8
A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1.
2.
Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Division 01.
After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been
energized, test[ service entrance and feeder conductors, and conductors
feeding the following critical equipment and services] for compliance with
requirements.
a.
3.
Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after
Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in cables and
conductors No. 3 AWG and larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices
are accessible to portable scanner.
a.
b.
c.
4.
B.
Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan
of each splice eleven (11) months after date of Substantial Completion.
Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure
temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide
calibration record for device.
Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies
splices checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of
deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after
remedial action.
Inspect wire and cable for physical damage and proper connection.
Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Prior to energizing, all building service cables, feeders to and/or from
transformers, switchboards and panel boards are to be tested with a
500-volt insulation megohm meter to determine insulation resistance levels.
All field test data is to be recorded, corrected to a baseline temperature and
furnished to the DIA Project Manager. A test is to include meggering for one
minute between conductors and between each conductor and ground.
Cables are to be meggered after installation with cables disconnected at
both ends. Insulation test values shall meet or exceed the values given
below.
Test procedures used.
Test results that comply with requirements.
Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to
achieve compliance with requirements.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
REVISION NO 00
260519-7
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260519
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
D.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT
4.1
A.
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
No separate measurement shall be made for work under this Section.
PART 5 - PAYMENT
5.1
A.
PAYMENT
No separate payment will be made for work under this Section. The cost of the work
described in this Section shall be included in the Lump Sum Contract price.
END OF SECTION 260519
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
REVISION NO 00
260519-8
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260526
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Grounding systems and equipment.
B.
Section includes grounding systems and equipment, plus the following special
applications:
1.
2.
3.
C.
1.3
Overhead-line grounding.
Underground distribution grounding.
Ground bonding common with lightning protection system.
Alternates: Refer to Division 01 Section 012300 "Alternates" for description of Work in
this Section affected by alternates.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Ground the electrical service system neutral at service entrance equipment to the
metallic water pipe service on building side only and to supplementary grounding
electrodes, as required by the contract documents and as required by the NEC.
B.
External (underground) metal pipes, water, gas, fuel, drain/sewer etc., are not
available for electrical grounding. This is due to extensive cathodic protection and
isolation joints of all underground metal pipes at DIA. These systems shall be bonded
to the grounding system on the building side only.
C.
Ground each separately derived system neutral to nearest building steel or referenced
ground plate in the electrical room.
D.
Provide a 2/0 minimum building perimeter-grounding conductor buried thirty inches
(30”) below finished grade thirty-six inches (36”) from foundation.
E.
Provide a minimum of three inch by twelve inch by one-quarter inch (3” x 12” x ¼”)
copper ground bar in the electrical room for connecting the grounding systems.
F.
An insulated equipment ground conductor shall be installed continuous from the main
switchgear or service entrance to all branch panelboards, motor control centers,
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
260526-1
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260526
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
transformers and all motors. This conductor shall be bonded to the conduit and metal
enclosures that it passes through utilizing bonding bushings and terminal devices.
1.4
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.
Include data substantiating that materials comply with requirements.
B.
Shop Drawings:
C.
Submit shop drawings, coordination drawings and product data in accordance with
provisions of Division 1. Submit all required information under a given specification
section together. Do not split out submittals under the same specification section.
1.
Clearly mark each shop drawing as follows for purposes of identification:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
Shop Drawing
Equipment Identification Used on Contract Drawings
Date
Name of Project
Branch of Work
Project Manager's Name
Contractor's Name
Indicate layout of ground ring, location of system grounding electrode
connections, and routing of grounding electrode conductors.
D.
Prior to submission, shop drawings, material lists and catalog cut sheets or
manufacturer's printed data shall be thoroughly checked for compliance with contract
requirements, compatibility with equipment being furnished by the Contractor or
Owner, accuracy of dimensions, coordination with work of other trades, and
conformance with sound and safe practice as to erection of installation. Each submittal
shall bear Contractor's signed statement evidencing such checking.
E.
Clearly mark printed material, catalog cut sheets, pamphlets or specification sheets,
and shop drawings with the same designation shown on the Contract Document
schedules.
1.5
A.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
Informational Submittals: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding
features specified in "Field Quality Control" Article, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
Test wells.
Ground rods.
Ground rings.
Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems.
Grounding for sensitive electronic equipment.
260526-2
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260526
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
B.
Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency and testing agency's field supervisor.
C.
Field quality-control reports.
1.6
A.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section
"Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1.
2.
B.
Tests shall determine if ground-resistance or impedance values remain within
specified maximums, and instructions shall recommend corrective action if
values do not.
Include recommended testing intervals.
Record Documents
1.
Maintain a contract set of electrical drawings and specifications at the site. Neatly
mark all changes, discoveries and deviations from the original drawings. Use a
reproducible color that contrasts with the prints. This shall be a separate set of
drawings, not used for construction purposes, and shall be updated daily as the
job progresses and shall be made available for inspection by the DIA Project
Manager at all times. Upon completion of the contract, this set of record drawings
shall be delivered to the DIA Project Manager. Follow DIA CADD standards, to
be furnished to the successful bidder. Record documents to be provided by the
Contractor shall clearly and accurately show the following:
a.
b.
c.
1.7
Provide horizontal and vertical dimensions for all raceway systems, size
and location, for both exterior and interior; locations of control devices;
distribution and branch electrical circuitry; and fuse and circuit breaker size
and arrangements.
Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from
prominent building lines.
Approved substitutions, Contract Modifications, and actual equipment and
materials installed.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
B.
Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
1.8
A.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
Construction waste shall be managed in accordance with provisions of Section 017419
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
260526-3
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260526
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
"Construction Waste Management and Disposal". Documentation shall be submitted to
satisfy the requirements of that Section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CONDUCTORS
A.
Insulated Conductors: Copper or tinned-copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V
unless otherwise required by applicable Codes.
B.
All ground wires shall be copper, sized according to the NEC or as shown on the
drawings which ever is larger.
C.
Bare Copper Conductors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
D.
Bare Grounding Conductor and Conductor Protector for Wood Poles:
1.
2.
E.
2.2
Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.
Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.
Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.
Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch (6 mm)
in diameter.
Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.
Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper
ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick.
Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with
copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick.
No. 4 AWG minimum, soft-drawn copper.
Conductor Protector: Half-round PVC or wood molding; if wood, use
pressure-treated fir, cypress, or cedar.
Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, [1/4 by 4 inches (6.3
by 100 mm)] <Insert dimensions> in cross section, with 9/32-inch (7.14-mm) holes
spaced 1-1/8 inches (28 mm) apart. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall comply with
UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V. Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V.
CONNECTORS
A.
Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for
applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of
conductors and other items connected.
B.
Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, pressure type
with at least two bolts.
1.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.
260526-4
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260526
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
C.
Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit
manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions. Exothermic welded
connections are required where grounding conductors connect to underground
grounding conductors and to underground grounding electrodes, and for bonding to
steel. All underground connections shall be exothermic welded.
D.
Bus-bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression
exothermic-type wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.
E.
Grounding Connection Accessories:
1.
2.3
Electrical insulating tape, heat-shrinkable insulating tubing, welding materials,
bonding straps, as recommended by accessories manufacturers for type of
service required.
GROUNDING ELECTRODES
A.
Ground Rods: [Copper-clad] [Zinc-coated] [Stainless steel]; [sectional type];3/4
inch by 10 feet (19 mm by 3 m) in diameter.
B.
Ground Rods in manholes ground rods shall be stainless steel ¾-inch diameter and a
minimum length of 10 feet.
C.
Chemical-Enhanced Grounding Electrodes: Copper tube, straight or L-shaped,
charged with [nonhazardous electrolytic chemical salts]
1.
2.
Termination: Factory-attached No. 4/0 AWG bare conductor at least 48 inches
(1200 mm) long.
Backfill Material: Electrode manufacturer's recommended material.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATIONS
A.
Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. [12] AWG and smaller, and stranded
conductors for No. [10] AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare [tinned-]copper conductor, No. [2/0]
AWG minimum.
1.
2.
C.
Bury at least 30 inches (750 mm) below grade.
Duct-Bank Grounding Conductor: Bury 12 inches (300 mm) above duct bank
when indicated as part of duct-bank installation.
Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow
stripe. On feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to
normal inspection, with alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three
bands of green and two bands of yellow.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
260526-5
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260526
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
D.
Grounding Bus: Install in electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in rooms housing
service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.
1.
2.
E.
Install bus on insulated spacers 2 inches (50 mm) minimum from wall, 6 inches
(150 mm) above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.
Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame,
across top of doorway, and down to specified height above floor; connect to
horizontal bus.
Conductor Terminations and Connections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.2
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.
Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as
otherwise indicated.
Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.
Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.
GROUNDING OVERHEAD LINES
A.
Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements.
B.
Install [two (2)] parallel ground rods if resistance to ground by a single, ground-rod
electrode exceeds 25 ohms.
C.
Drive ground rods until tops are 12 inches (300 mm) below finished grade in
undisturbed earth.
D.
Ground-Rod Connections: Install bolted connectors for underground connections and
connections to rods.
E.
Lightning Arrester Grounding Conductors: Separate from other grounding conductors.
F.
Secondary Neutral and Transformer Enclosure: Interconnect and connect to grounding
conductor.
G.
Protect grounding conductors running on surface of wood poles with molding extended
from grade level up to and through communication service and transformer spaces.
3.3
GROUNDING UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A.
Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements.
B.
Grounding Manholes and Handholes: Install a driven ground rod through manhole or
handhole floor, close to wall, and set rod depth so 4 inches (100 mm) will extend
above finished floor. If necessary, install ground rod before manhole is placed and
provide No. 1/0 AWG bare, tinned-copper conductor from ground rod into manhole
through a waterproof sleeve in manhole wall. Protect ground rods passing through
concrete floor with a double wrapping of pressure-sensitive insulating tape or
heat-shrunk insulating sleeve from 2 inches (50 mm) above to 6 inches (150 mm)
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
260526-6
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260526
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
below concrete. Seal floor opening with waterproof, nonshrink grout.
C.
Grounding Connections to Manhole Components: Bond exposed-metal parts such as
inserts, cable racks, pulling irons, ladders, and cable shields within each manhole or
handhole, to ground rod or grounding conductor. Make connections with No. 4 AWG
minimum, stranded, hard-drawn copper bonding conductor. Train conductors level or
plumb around corners and fasten to manhole walls. Connect to cable armor and cable
shields according to written instructions by manufacturer of splicing and termination
kits.
D.
Pad-Mounted Transformers and Switches: Install two ground rods and ground ring
around the pad. Ground pad-mounted equipment and noncurrent-carrying metal items
associated with substations by connecting them to underground cable and grounding
electrodes. Install tinned-copper conductor not less than No. 2 AWG for ground ring
and for taps to equipment grounding terminals. Bury ground ring not less than 6 inches
(150 mm) from the foundation.
3.4
EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A.
Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.
B.
Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition
to those required by NFPA 70:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Feeders and branch circuits.
Lighting circuits.
Receptacle circuits.
Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.
Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.
Flexible raceway runs.
Armored and metal-clad cable runs.
Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from
grounding bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment
grounding bar terminal on busway.
Computer and Rack-Mounted Electronic Equipment Circuits: Install insulated
equipment grounding conductor in branch-circuit runs from equipment-area
power panels and power-distribution units.
X-Ray Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor in
circuits supplying x-ray equipment.
C.
Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to
duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners,
heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment.
D.
Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated
equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable.
Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.
E.
Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
260526-7
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260526
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
conductor connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate conductor from
raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding
conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service unless otherwise
indicated.
F.
Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a
branch circuit or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply circuit raceway with
a nonmetallic raceway fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters
enclosure, and install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor. Isolate
conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at
equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service
unless otherwise indicated.
G.
Signal and Communication Equipment: In addition to grounding and bonding required
by NFPA 70, provide a separate grounding system complying with requirements in
TIA/ATIS J-STD-607-A.
1.
2.
3.
H.
3.5
For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication equipment,
provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from
grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring
closet, and central equipment location.
Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate
grounding conductor on a 1/4-by-4-by-12-inch (6.3-by-100-by-300-mm)
grounding bus.
Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding
terminal.
Metal and Wood Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding
electrode and a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to
grounding conductor installed with branch-circuit conductors.
INSTALLATION
A.
Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless
otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing
conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.
B.
Ground Bonding Common with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780
and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system. Bond electrical
power system ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at
closest point to electrical service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized
same as system grounding electrode conductor, and install in conduit.
C.
Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches (50 mm) below finished floor or final
grade unless otherwise indicated.
1.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as
otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging
coating if any.
260526-8
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260526
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
2.
D.
Test Wells: Install at least one (1) test well for each service unless otherwise
indicated. Install at the ground rod electrically closest to service entrance. Set top
of test well flush with finished grade or floor.
Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and
maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit.
1.
2.
3.
F.
For grounding electrode system, install at least [three (3)] rods spaced at least
one-rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from other
grounding electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor.
Test Wells: Ground rod driven through drilled hole in bottom of handhole. Handholes
are specified in Section 260543 "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical
Systems," and shall be at least 12 inches (300 mm) deep, with cover.
1.
E.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to
penetrate any adjacent parts.
Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports:
Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.
Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type
connection is required, use a bolted clamp.
Grounding and Bonding for Piping:
1.
2.
3.
Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in
conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal
water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal
water service pipes; use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to
a pipe flange by using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main
water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting.
Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.
Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass
water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.
Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from
equipment shutoff valve.
G.
Retain and revise first paragraph below to exceed NFPA 70 requirements, and comply
with NFPA 70 recommendations for a higher standard of safety or electromagnetic
interference suppression if needed.
H.
Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors
of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install [tinned ]bonding
jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.
I.
Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each
corner column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet
(18 m) apart.
J.
Ground Ring: Install a grounding conductor, electrically connected to each building
structure ground rod and to each [steel column] extending around the perimeter of
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
260526-9
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260526
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
[building].
1.
2.
K.
Ufer Ground (Concrete-Encased Grounding Electrode): Fabricate according to NFPA
70; use a minimum of [20 feet (6 m)] of bare copper conductor not smaller than No. [4]
AWG.
1.
2.
3.6
Install tinned-copper conductor not less than No. [2/0] AWG for ground ring and
for taps to building steel.
Bury ground ring not less than [24 inches (600 mm)] from building's foundation.
If concrete foundation is less than [20 feet (6 m)] long, coil excess conductor
within base of foundation.
Bond grounding conductor to reinforcing steel in at least four locations and to
anchor bolts. Extend grounding conductor below grade and connect to building's
grounding grid or to grounding electrode external to concrete.
LABELING
A.
Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems"
Article for instruction signs.
B.
Install labels at the telecommunications bonding conductor and grounding equalizer
[and at the grounding electrode conductor where exposed].
1.
3.7
A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Perform tests and inspections.
1.
B.
Label Text: "If this connector or cable is loose or if it must be removed for any
reason, notify the facility manager."
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative
to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including
connections, and to assist in testing.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have
been energized, test for compliance with requirements.
Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted,
electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum
ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding
terminal[, at ground test wells] [, and at individual ground rods]. Make tests
at ground rods before any conductors are connected.
Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of
precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural
drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of
260526-10
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260526
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
5.
6.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
reducing natural ground resistance.
Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.
Prepare dimensioned Drawings locating each test well, ground rod and
ground-rod assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in
alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the
number of rods driven and their depth at each location, and include observations
of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures
taken to improve test results.
C.
Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and
inspections.
D.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
E.
Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
F.
Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less:
[10] ohms.
Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 to 1000 kVA: [5]
ohms.
Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA:
[3] ohms.
Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: [1] [3]
ohm(s).
Substations and Pad-Mounted Equipment: [5] ohms.
Manhole Grounds: [10] ohms.
Ground resistance to earth of each ground rod: > 5 ohms.
Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify
DIA Electrical Engineer promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground
resistance.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT
4.1
A.
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
No separate measurement shall be made for work under this Section.
PART 5 - PAYMENT
5.1
A.
PAYMENT
No separate payment will be made for work under this Section. The cost of the work
described in this Section shall be included in the Lump Sum Contract price.
END OF SECTION 260526
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
260526-11
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260526
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
260526-12
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
C.
1.3
Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.
Construction requirements for concrete bases.
Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems" for
products and installation requirements necessary for compliance with seismic
criteria.
Alternates: Refer to Division 01 Section 012300 "Alternates" for description of Work in
this Section affected by alternates.
DEFINITIONS
A.
EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
B.
RMC: Rigid metal conduit.
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive
engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance
requirements and design criteria indicated.
B.
Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of
supported systems and its contents.
C.
Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of
supported equipment and connected systems and components.
D.
Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
260529-1
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
1.5
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
A.
1.7
A.
1.8
Steel slotted support systems.
Nonmetallic slotted support systems.
Include data substantiating that materials comply with requirements.
Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show
fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.6
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components.
Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components.
Nonmetallic slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components.
Equipment supports.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
Welding certificates.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
As-Built Plans: Submit complete as-built plans of all Work, including interface with
other Work, in accordance with requirements as specified in Section 013300
"Submittal Procedures".
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural
Welding Code - Steel."
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
1.9
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.
B.
Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These
items are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."
1.10
A.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
Construction waste shall be managed in accordance with provisions of Section 017419
"Construction Waste Management and Disposal". Documentation shall be submitted to
satisfy the requirements of that Section.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
260529-2
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components
for field assembly.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Allied Tube & Conduit.
Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
ERICO International Corporation.
GS Metals Corp.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.
Wesanco, Inc.
or approved equal.
Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to
MFMA-4.
Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester
coating applied according to MFMA-4.
Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to
MFMA-4. For use in dry locations only.
Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.
Nonmetallic Slotted Support Systems: Structural-grade, factory-formed,
glass-fiber-resin channels and angles with 9/16-inch (14-mm) diameter holes at a
maximum of 8 inches (200 mm) o.c., in at least 1 surface.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
4.
Allied Tube & Conduit.
Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
Fabco Plastics Wholesale Limited.
Seasafe, Inc.
or approved equal.
Fittings and Accessories: Products of channel and angle manufacturer and
designed for use with those items.
Fitting and Accessory Materials: Same as channels and angles[, except metal
items may be stainless steel].
Rated Strength: Selected to suit applicable load criteria.
C.
Hardware for hangers and supports shall be corrosion-resistant.
D.
Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
260529-3
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
E.
Conduit and Cable Support Devices: [Steel] hangers, clamps, and associated fittings,
designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
F.
Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of
threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical
conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of
conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables
supported. Body shall be malleable iron.
G.
Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel
plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
H.
Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items
or their supports to building surfaces include the following:
1.
Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, [zinc-coated] [stainless]
steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and
pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which
used.
a.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by one of the following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to
MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.
Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable
for attached structural element.
Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM
A 325.
Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
Pneumatic-Actuated Fasteners: For use in ceilings only and by approval of DIA
Project Manager. Powder-actuated tools are prohibited. Threaded-steel stud, for
use in pan deck cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout
capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
a.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by one of the following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc.
Hilti Inc.
ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
MKT Fastening, LLC.
or approved equal.
Hilti Inc.
ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
MKT Fastening, LLC.
Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit.
260529-4
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
5)
2.2
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
or approved equal.
FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES
A.
Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit
dimensions of supported equipment.
B.
Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for
steel shapes and plates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for
electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.
B.
Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space
supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as [required by] [scheduled in NECA 1, where its
Table 1 lists maximum spacings less than stated in] NFPA 70. Minimum rod size
shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter.
C.
Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted
[or other ]support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least [25] percent
in future without exceeding specified design load limits.
1.
D.
3.2
Secure raceways and cables to these supports with [two-bolt conduit clamps]
[single-bolt conduit clamps] [single-bolt conduit clamps using spring
friction action for retention in support channel].
Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used
for 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and
communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to
trapeze supports.
SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified
in this Article.
B.
Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT and
RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in
NFPA 70.
C.
Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so
strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified
loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
260529-5
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
weight of supported components plus 200 lb (90 kg).
D.
Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor
and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the
following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.
To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.
To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion
anchor fasteners on solid masonry units.
To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.
To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS
SP-69 or Spring-tension clamps, as appropriate and with sufficient weight rating
for the application.
To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount
cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction
boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to
substrate[ by means that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage
requirements for a seismic zone 1.]
E.
Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid
reinforcing bars.
F.
Do not fasten supports to piping, ductwork, mechanical equipment, cable tray or
conduit.
G.
The use of pneumatic-actuated anchors is not allowed except at ceilings. Obtain DIA
Project Manager approval prior to ordering materials or performing work.
H.
Do not drill structural steel members.
I.
Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors
J.
Suspended conduit or box supports shall not be less than 1/4" diameter steel rod. Rod
used as pedestal support is not acceptable. The contractor shall not use tie wire or
wire of any type to support conduits, junction boxes or pull boxes.
K.
No more than five (5) 1/2" conduits, three (3) 3/4" conduits or two (2) 1" conduits shall
be supported on a single 1/4" diameter steel rod.
L.
All conduits shall be supported by approved hangers. Supports installed and used by
other trades such as duct hangers, pipe hangers, ceiling hangers, etc. shall not be
used for conduit support.
M.
All light fixtures shall be independently supported at opposite corners from structure, or
from trapeze supported from structure by the electrical contractor.
N.
Wall-mounted fixtures shall be supported from building structure with backing support
as approved by the DIA Project Manager to prevent any damage to the wall.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
260529-6
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
O.
Use vibration isolation pads for vibrating equipment such as transformers.
P.
Plastic or fiber anchors are prohibited.
Q.
Anchoring in overhead cast in place, pre-tensioned or post-tensioned concrete is
prohibited unless x-ray or ground penetrating radar study are performed and approved
by the DIA Project Manager.
R.
Route conduit through roof openings provided for piping and ductwork where possible;
otherwise, route through roof jack with sealant approved by the roofing manufacturer.
3.3
INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS
A.
Comply with installation requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for
site-fabricated metal supports.
B.
Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and
elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
3.4
CONCRETE BASES
A.
Install all freestanding electrical equipment on a 4" concrete housekeeping pad.
B.
Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches (100 mm)
larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10
bolt diameters from edge of the base.
C.
Use [3000-psi (20.7-MPa)] <Insert value>, 28-day compressive-strength concrete.
Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in
Section[s] "[033000Cast-in-Place Concrete] [033053 Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place
Concrete]."
D.
Anchor equipment to concrete base.
1.
2.
3.
3.5
A.
Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's
setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with
items to be embedded.
Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported
equipment.
Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
PAINTING
Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas
immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for
shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
260529-7
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
surfaces.
1.
Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils
(0.05 mm).
B.
Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 [painting Sections] [Section
099600 "High-Performance Coatings"] for cleaning and touchup painting of field
welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.
C.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT
4.1
A.
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
No separate measurement shall be made for work under this Section.
PART 5 - PAYMENT
5.1
A.
PAYMENT
No separate payment will be made for work under this Section. The cost of the work
described in this Section shall be included in the Lump Sum Contract price.
END OF SECTION 260529
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
260529-8
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260533
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Division 26 Section 260543 "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical
Systems" for exterior ductbanks, manholes, and underground utility construction.
Division 27 Section 270528 "Pathways for Communications Systems" for
conduits, wireways, surface pathways, innerduct, boxes, faceplate adapters,
enclosures, cabinets, and handholes serving communications systems.
Division 28 Section 280528 "Pathways for Electronic Safety and Security" for
conduits, surface pathways, innerduct, boxes, and faceplate adapters serving
electronic safety and security.
Division 26 Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" for
additional grounding and bonding requirements.
Prohibited Materials
1.
2.
3.
D.
Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings.
Nonmetal conduits, tubing, and fittings.
Innerduct
Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters.
Nonmetal wireways and auxiliary gutters.
Surface raceways.
Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.
Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling.
Buried conduits in concrete encased duct banks.
Intermediate conduits.
Aluminum conduit.
Multi-conductor assemblies, unless written authorization is obtained from DIA
Project Manager, or specifically allowed within specification.
Project Conditions
1.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
Verify locations of outlets and small pull-boxes prior to rough in.
260533-1
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260533
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
2.
E.
1.3
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
Electrical and pull boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless
dimensioned. Install at location required for box to serve intended purpose.
Alternates: Refer to Division 01 Section 012300 "Alternates" for description of Work in
this Section affected by alternates.
DEFINITIONS
A.
GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.
B.
RMC: Rigid Metallic Conduit.
C.
RNC: Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit.
D.
EMT: Electrical Metallic Conduit.
E.
FMC: Flexible Metallic Conduit.
F.
LFMC: Liquidtight Flexible Metallic Conduit.
G.
HDPE: High Density Polyethelene.
H.
FNC: Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit.
I.
ENT: Electrical non-metallic conduit.
J.
MC: Metal-clad cable.
1.4
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover
enclosures, and cabinets.
1.
B.
Include data substantiating that materials comply with requirements.
LEED Submittals (if required):
1.
2.
Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For solvent cements and adhesive primers,
documentation including printed statement of VOC content.
Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4: For solvent cements and adhesive
primers, documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and
product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard
Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources
Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
C.
Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations,
sections, and attachment details.
D.
Samples: Per request.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
260533-2
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260533
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
E.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
F.
Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following
items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items
involved:
1.
2.
Structural members in paths of conduit groups with common supports.
HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups
with common supports.
G.
Qualification Data: For professional engineer.
H.
Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosures, cabinets, and conduit racks and
their mounting provisions, including those for internal components, from manufacturer.
I.
Source quality-control reports.
1.5
A.
1.6
A.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
As-Built Plans: Submit complete as-built plans of all Work, including interface with
other Work, in accordance with requirements as specified in Section 013300
"Submittal Procedures".
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
Construction waste shall be managed in accordance with provisions of Section 017419
"Construction Waste Management and Disposal". Documentation shall be submitted to
satisfy the requirements of that Section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co.
Anamet Electrical, Inc.
Electri-Flex Company.
O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group.
Picoma Industries, a subsidiary of Mueller Water Products, Inc.
Republic Conduit.
Robroy Industries.
Southwire Company.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
Western Tube and Conduit Corporation.
260533-3
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260533
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
12.
13.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
Wheatland Tube Company; a division of John Maneely Company.
or approved equal.
B.
Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location
and application.
C.
GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.
D.
PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit.
1.
2.
Comply with NEMA RN 1.
Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch (1 mm), minimum.
E.
EMT: Galvanized tubing. Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.
F.
FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel.
G.
LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.
H.
Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.
1.
2.
Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and
NFPA 70.
Fittings for EMT:
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
I.
Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651,
rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external
bonding jumper.
Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch (1
mm), with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.
Innerduct:
1.
Inner duct, meeting or exceeding the following requirements, shall be used to
partition conduit.
a.
b.
c.
d.
J.
Material: Steel.
Type: Set screw or compression.
Provide throated connectors where entering junction boxes.
Melting point: 260 degrees F., minimum.
Tensile yield strength: 3600 psi/sq. in., minimum
Brittleness temperature, maximum: -140 degrees F.
Heat distortion temperature: 170 degrees F minimum.
Joint Compound for GRC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having
jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and
protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
260533-4
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260533
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
2.2
A.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
NONMETALLIC CONDUITS AND FITTINGS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
Anamet Electrical, Inc.
Arnco Corporation.
CANTEX Inc.
CertainTeed Corp.
Condux International, Inc.
Electri-Flex Company.
Kraloy.
Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
Niedax-Kleinhuis USA, Inc.
RACO; a Hubbell company.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
or approved equal.
B.
Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and
labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended
location and application.
C.
RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise
indicated.
D.
Rigid HDPE: Comply with UL 651A.
E.
Continuous HDPE: Comply with UL 651B.
F.
Coilable HDPE: Preassembled with conductors or cables, and complying with ASTM D
3485.
G.
RTRC: Comply with UL 1684A and NEMA TC 14.
H.
Fittings for RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and
material.
I.
Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L
or less, respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24).
J.
Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product
requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for
the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale
Environmental Chambers."
2.3
A.
METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
260533-5
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260533
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Cooper B-Line, Inc.
Hoffman; a Pentair company.
Mono-Systems, Inc.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
or approved equal.
Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1, Type 3R or
Type 4x, and sized according to NFPA 70.
1.
Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA
70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
C.
Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints,
adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with
wireways as required for complete system.
D.
Wireway Covers: Hinged type or screw cover.
E.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.
2.4
A.
NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Allied Moulded Products, Inc.
Hoffman; a Pentair company.
Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
Niedax-Kleinhuis USA, Inc.
or approved equal.
B.
Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic wireways and auxiliary gutters shall be listed and
labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended
location and application.
C.
Description: Fiberglass polyester, extruded and fabricated to required size and shape,
without holes or knockouts. Cover shall be gasketed with oil-resistant gasket material
and fastened with captive screws treated for corrosion resistance. Connections shall
be flanged and have stainless-steel screws and oil-resistant gaskets.
D.
Description: Schedule 40 PVC, extruded and fabricated to required size and shape,
and having snap-on cover, mechanically coupled connections, and plastic fasteners.
E.
Fittings and Accessories: Couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters,
hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings shall match and mate with wireways as
required for complete system.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
260533-6
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260533
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
F.
Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L
or less, respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24).
G.
Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product
requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for
the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale
Environmental Chambers."
2.5
SURFACE RACEWAYS
A.
Listing and Labeling: Surface raceways shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA
70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B.
Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers complying with UL 5.
Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by the DEN Project
Manager.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
C.
Surface Nonmetallic Raceways: Two- or three-piece construction, complying with UL
5A, and manufactured of rigid PVC with texture and color selected by DIA Project
Manager from manufacturer's standard colors. Product shall comply with UL 94 V-0
requirements for self-extinguishing characteristics.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.6
A.
Mono-Systems, Inc.
Panduit Corp.
Wiremold / Legrand.
or approved equal.
Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems Division.
Mono-Systems, Inc.
Panduit Corp.
Wiremold / Legrand.
or approved equal.
BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
Adalet.
Cooper Technologies Company; Cooper Crouse-Hinds.
EGS/Appleton Electric.
Erickson Electrical Equipment Company.
260533-7
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260533
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
FSR Inc.
Hoffman; a Pentair company.
Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Division.
Kraloy.
Milbank Manufacturing Co.
Mono-Systems, Inc.
O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group.
RACO; a Hubbell Company.
Robroy Industries.
Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company.
Stahlin Non-Metallic Enclosures; a division of Robroy Industries.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
Wiremold / Legrand.
or approved equal.
B.
General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and
cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.
C.
Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Galvanized steel. Comply with NEMA OS 1 and
UL 514A.
D.
Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type
FD, with gasketed cover. Provide threaded hubs.
E.
Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Prohibited, unless specifically allowed in writing
by the DEN Project Manager.
F.
Metal Floor Boxes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
G.
Material: Cast metal.
Type: Fully adjustable.
Shape: [Rectangular] [round]
Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
Nonmetallic Floor Boxes: Prohibited, unless specifically allowed by the DEN Project
Manager.
1.
Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended
location and application.
H.
Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing
50 lb (23 kg). Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than
50 lb (23 kg) shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight.
I.
Paddle Fan Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of paddle fan
weighing 70 lb (32 kg).
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
260533-8
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260533
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
1.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
Listing and Labeling: Paddle fan outlet boxes shall be listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended
location and application.
J.
Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: Galvanized steel. NEMA OS 1.
K.
Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773,
galvanized, cast iron with gasketed cover.
L.
Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material
as recessed box.
M.
Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep (100 mm square by 60
mm deep) or as approved by DIA Project Manager.
N.
Gangable boxes are allowed.
O.
Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1, Type 3R or
Type 4x as appropriate, with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise
indicated. Screw cover enclosures: VL50 & NEMA 1.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard
enamel.
Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic or Fiberglass.
Interior Panels: Steel; 14 gage steel, 12 gage if floor mounted, all sides finished
with manufacturer's standard enamel, white.
Large Pull Boxes: Boxes larger than 100 cubic inches in volume or 12 inches in
any dimension.
a.
b.
P.
Interior Dry Locations: Use hinged or screw covered enclosure.
Interior damp or wet locations: Use nema 3R hinged cover boxes.
Cabinets:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
NEMA 250, [Type 3R] galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and
removable [front][end walls], finished inside and out with manufacturer's
standard enamel, gray.
Cabinet Fronts: Steel, flush or surface type as indicated, with concealed trim
clamps, concealed hinge and flush lock keyed to match branch circuit
panelboard; finish in gray baked enamel.
Provide 3/4-inch thick fire retardant plywood backboard or galvanized steel back
plate painted matte white, for mounting terminal blocks.
Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.
Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.
Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
Fabrication:
a.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
Shop assemble enclosures and cabinets housing terminal blocks or
electrical components in accordance with ANSI/NEMA ICS 6.
260533-9
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260533
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
b.
c.
Q.
3.
4.
A.
All terminal Blocks: ANSI/NEMA ICS 4; UL listed.
Power Terminals: Unit construction type, closed-back type, with tubular pressure
screw terminals, rated 600 volts.
Signal and Control Terminals: Modular construction type, channel mounted;
tubular pressure screw terminals, rated 300 volts.
Power and signal/control wiring will use separate terminal blocks.
HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING
General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes:
1.
2.
B.
Provide knockouts on enclosures.
Provide protective pocket inside front cover with schematic diagram,
connection diagram, and layout drawing of control wiring and components
within enclosure.
Terminal blocks and accessories:
1.
2.
2.7
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
Boxes and handholes for use in underground systems shall be designed and
identified as defined in NFPA 70, for intended location and application.
Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete or stainless steel
Cover: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and
reinforced with steel, fiberglass, or a combination of the two.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
Armorcast Products Company.
Carson Industries LLC.
CDR Systems Corporation; Hubbell Power Systems.
NewBasis.
Oldcastle Precast, Inc.; Christy Concrete Products.
Synertech Moulded Products; a division of Oldcastle Precast, Inc.
or approved equal.
Standard: Comply with SCTE 77.
Configuration: Designed for flush burial with [open] bottom unless otherwise
indicated.
Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having
structural load rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location.
Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50.
Cover Legend: Molded lettering, ["ELECTRIC."]
Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering
ducts for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall.
Handholes [12 Inches Wide by 24 Inches Long (300 mm Wide by 600 mm Long)]
and Larger: Have inserts for cable racks and pulling-in irons installed before
260533-10
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260533
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
concrete is poured.
C.
Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes: Molded of fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin, with
frame and covers of polymer concrete or stainless steel.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
2.8
A.
Armorcast Products Company.
Carson Industries LLC.
CDR Systems Corporation; Hubbell Power Systems.
NewBasis.
Nordic Fiberglass, Inc.
Oldcastle Precast, Inc.; Christy Concrete Products.
Synertech Moulded Products; a division of Oldcastle Precast, Inc.
or approved equal.
Standard: Comply with SCTE 77.
Color of Frame and Cover: [Gray] [Green].
Configuration: Designed for flush burial with [open] [closed] [integral closed]
bottom unless otherwise indicated.
Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having
structural load rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location.
Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50.
Cover Legend: Molded lettering, ["ELECTRIC."]
Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering
ducts for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall.
Handholes [12 Inches Wide by 24 Inches Long (300 mm Wide by 600 mm Long)]
<Insert dimensions> and Larger: Have inserts for cable racks and pulling-in
irons installed before concrete is poured.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL FOR UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURES
Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of handholes and boxes for
compliance with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products
supplied.
1.
2.
3.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
Tests of materials shall be performed by an independent testing agency.
Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent
testing agency or manufacturer. A qualified registered professional engineer shall
certify tests by manufacturer.
Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification
complying with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012 and traceable to NIST standards.
260533-11
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260533
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
RACEWAY APPLICATION
A.
Raceways shall not be installed in stairways or on the exterior of any building, unless
specifically allowed by DIA Project Manager.
B.
Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
3.
Exposed Conduit: RMC.
Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: RMC.
Underground Conduit: Encased in concrete per Section 260543, "Underground
Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems.”
a.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Exposed Conduit in Parking Garages or other covered structures open to
environment:
a.
Below 8'-0" AFF or within 10-0" of extent of covered area: Galvanized RMC.
b.
Above 8'-0" AFF and more than 10'-0" from extent of covered area: EMT
with compression-type weatherproof/rain-tight connectors.
Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic,
Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.
Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R Type 4.
Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
3.
Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.
Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT.
Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC . Raceway locations
include the following:
a.
b.
4.
5.
6.
7.
D.
Direct buried conduits are not allowed unless specifically allowed by the
DIA Project Manager.
Loading dock.
Baggage tunnels
Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.
Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic,
Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use
LFMC in damp or wet locations.
Wet Locations: GRC.
Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4
stainless steel in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet
locations.
CONDUIT INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
260533-12
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260533
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
1.
2.
Underground Installations More Than Five Feet From Foundation Wall: Polyvinyl
Chloride (PVC) conduit Schedule 40. All bends greater than 45 degrees in
non-metallic conduit shall be galvanized rigid steel conduit with a factory coating
of polyvinyl chloride (PVC).
Installation In Concrete Slab: Not allowed.
a.
3.
4.
5.
6.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
All buried conduits containing cabling shall be installed in concrete encased
duct banks.
In Slab Above Grade: Not allowed.
Wet Interior Locations: Rigid steel.
Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Electrical metallic tubing.
In Existing Walls of Existing Structure: Electrical metallic tubing or MC Cable.
E.
Minimum Raceway Size: [1/2-inch (16-mm)] [3/4-inch (19-mm)] trade size.
F.
Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
1.
2.
3.
Rigid Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise
indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.
PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with
this type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating
after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting
manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by
manufacturer.
EMT: Use setscrew, or compression, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.
a.
b.
4.
Setscrew fittings to be used for indoor applications in dry locations only.
Compression fittings may be used in indoor or outdoor locations for damp
or wet locations.
Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with
NEMA FB 2.20.
G.
Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings.
H.
Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F (49
deg C).
I.
Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the conduit type
indicated for the specified applications. Where more than one listed application
applies, comply with the most restrictive requirements. Where conduit type for a
particular application is not specified, use Galvanized Rigid Conduit.
3.2
A.
INSTALLATION
Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where
requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NFPA 70
limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
260533-13
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260533
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
B.
Maintain a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) between conduit and other piping. Maintain
twelve inches (12” ) clearance between conduit and a heat source such as heating
pipes, exhaust flues and heating appliances. Install horizontal raceway runs above
water and steam piping.
C.
Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
D.
Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical
Systems" for hangers and supports.
E.
Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.
F.
Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except
for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 24
inches (610 mm) of changes in direction.
G.
Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise
indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines. Use conduit bodies
to make changes in direction around beams or columns.
H.
Support conduit within 24 inches (610 mm) of enclosures to which attached. Support
conduit at a maximum of 8 feet on center, within two (2) feet of a box or fitting.
I.
Use only factory cast hubs for fastening conduit to cast boxes, and use steel or
malleable iron hubs for fastening conduit to sheet metal boxes or equipment in damp
or wet locations.
J.
Avoid moisture traps where possible; where unavoidable, provide junction box with
drain fitting at conduit low point.
K.
Use suitable conduit caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and
moisture during construction.
L.
Use PVC-coated rigid steel factory elbows for bends greater than 45 degrees in plastic
conduit runs.
M.
Exposed conduits subject to physical damage to be rigid steel to 6'-0" above floor,
deck or grating except in electrical, communications and mechanical rooms.
N.
Conduit stubbed up shall be two inches above slab or housekeeping pad and the
empty conduits shall be capped. Under freestanding equipment conduits with
conductors shall be sealed with duct seal.
O.
Flexible steel conduit runs shall not exceed 6’ in length when connecting equipment, 6'
in length when connecting light fixtures or when fished in hollow spaces with written
approval by DIA Project Manager and shall contain a grounding conductor.
P.
Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:
1.
2.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
Use EMT or RMC for raceways.
Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in
260533-14
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260533
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
hubs or in an enclosure.
Q.
Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions:
Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints.
Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.
R.
Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive
compound prior to assembly.
S.
Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating
bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.
T.
Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside
of boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch (35mm) trade size
and insulated throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch (41-mm) trade size and larger
conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on
service conduits.
U.
Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts.
Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.
V.
Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove
coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a
continuous ground path.
W.
Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch (53-mm) trade size and
larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.
X.
Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line
with not less than 160-lb (72-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of
slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above
grade alongside raceways in use.
Y.
Surface Raceways:
1.
2.
Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inch (50-mm) radius control at bend
points.
Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not
exceeding 48 inches (1200 mm) and with no less than two supports per straight
raceway section. Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods.
Z.
Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill
them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a
flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates
or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.
AA.
Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no
fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal
the interior of all raceways at the following points:
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
260533-15
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260533
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
1.
2.
3.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of
refrigerated spaces.
Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure.
Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.
BB.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings.
CC.
Expansion-Joint Fittings:
1.
2.
Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental
temperature change may exceed 30 deg F (17 deg C) and that has straight-run
length that exceeds 25 feet (7.6 m). Install in each run of aboveground RMC and
EMT conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may
exceed 100 deg F (55 deg C) and that has straight-run length that exceeds 100
feet (30 m).
Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed
for each of the following locations:
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
5.
6.
DD.
Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch
per foot of length of straight run per deg F (0.06 mm per meter of length of
straight run per deg C) of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s)
that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of
length of straight run per deg F (0.0115 mm per meter of length of straight run
per deg C) of temperature change for metal conduits.
Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure
expansion joints.
Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting
selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific
location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion
movement.
Provide external bonding jumper for all expansion fittings..
Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches
(1830 mm) of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed luminaires, equipment
subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and
motors. All vibrating equipment such as motors, transformers, and generators shall be
connected with flexible steel conduit, not to exceed six feet in length.
1.
2.
EE.
Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F (70 deg C)
temperature change.
Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F (86 deg C)
temperature change.
Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125
deg F (70 deg C) temperature change.
Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.
Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical
damage.
Size conduit for conductor type installed or for Type THHN conductors, whichever is
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
260533-16
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260533
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
larger.
FF.
Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present a neat appearance. Certain
existing conditions may allow a waiver to this item.
GG.
Arrange conduit supports to prevent distortion of alignment by wire pulling operations.
Fasten conduit using galvanized straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, or
bolted split stamped galvanized hangers.
HH.
Group conduit in parallel runs where practical and use conduit rack constructed of
steel channel with conduit straps or clamps. Provide space for 25 percent additional
conduit.
II.
Do not support conduit from cable tray or cable tray supports.
JJ.
Flexible conduit shall not be less than one-half (1/2) inch except when supplied with
lighting fixtures. MC Cable shall be allowed in lieu of flexible conduit for light fixtures in
lengths of 6 feet or less.
KK.
When anchoring to a dual sheet metal pan deck and concrete, anchors of any type
when placed from below the deck shall be placed only in the lower pan form. No
anchors shall be installed in the upper (high) pan.
LL.
X-ray [or ground penetrating radar] studies shall be made of concrete floors, walls or
CMU walls.
MM. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. Install boxes with height measured to
center of box unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate mounting heights and locations
of boxes or outlets so as not to be interfered with by grounding systems, electrical
panels, or any other building accessory.
NN.
Coordinate installation of outlet or equipment boxes for systems or products furnished
under other sections.
OO.
Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of
masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to
provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or
supported equipment and box.
PP.
Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the
same vertical channel. Provide minimum 8 inch separation.
QQ.
Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.
RR.
Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two
framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.
SS.
Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support
boxes by conduits.
TT.
Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
260533-17
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260533
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
UU.
Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor
surface.
VV.
Install electrical boxes as shown on Drawings, and as required for equipment, terminal
strips, splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections and compliance with
regulatory requirements.
WW. Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches
from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed light fixture.
XX.
Align adjacent wall-mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar
devices with each other.
YY.
Use adjustable steel channel fasteners or all thread for hanging ceiling outlet box,
support box from structure.
ZZ.
Support boxes in the ceiling with ¼" threaded rod as a minimum.
AAA. Use appropriate gang box where more than one device is mounted together.
BBB. Use 4 inch square box with plaster ring for single device outlets.
CCC. Use malleable iron outlet box when surface mounted: on exterior of building, in wet
location or damp location.
DDD. Minimum junction and pull box size 4-11/16" x 4-11/16" x 2-1/8" .
EEE. Minimum outlet box size 4" x 4" x 2-1/8” including feed through outlet boxes.
FFF. Minimum junction box size for fire alarm pull stations, control module, monitor module,
4" x 4" x 2-1/8". Provide plaster ring at all pull station locations.
GGG. Use flush mounting outlet boxes in finished areas.
HHH. Install knockout closure in unused box openings.
III.
Install cabinets and enclosures plumb; anchor securely to wall and structural supports
at each corner, minimum.
JJJ.
All floor-mounted equipment shall be on a 4" nominal concrete housekeeping pad.
KKK. No cabinet shall be supported on slab or grade.
3.3
A.
INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT
Refer to Division 26 Section "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical
Systems" for underground conduit installation requirements.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
260533-18
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260533
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
3.4
A.
3.5
A.
3.6
A.
3.7
A.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES
Refer to Division 26 Section "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical
Systems" for underground handhole and box installation requirements
SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies.
Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical
Raceways and Cabling."
FIRESTOPPING
Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with
requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."
PROTECTION
Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.
1.
2.
Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by
manufacturer.
Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating
recommended by manufacturer.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT
4.1
A.
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
No separate measurement shall be made for work under this Section.
PART 5 - PAYMENT
5.1
A.
PAYMENT
No separate payment will be made for work under this Section. The cost of the work
described in this Section shall be included in the Lump Sum Contract price.
END OF SECTION 260533
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
260533-19
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260544
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL
RACEWAYS AND CABLING
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
SECTION 260544 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND
CABLING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
C.
1.3
A.
Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for penetration firestopping installed
in fire-resistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with
and without penetrating items.
Alternates: Refer to Division 01 Section 012300 "Alternates" for description of Work in
this Section affected by alternates.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product.
1.
B.
Sleeves for raceway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls
and floors.
Sleeve-seal systems.
Sleeve-seal fittings.
Grout.
Silicone sealants.
Include data substantiating that materials comply with requirements.
LEED Submittals:
1.
2.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For sealants, documentation including printed
statement of VOC content.
Laboratory Test Reports for Credit EQ 4: For sealants, documentation
indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements of the
California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of
Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale
260544-1
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260544
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL
RACEWAYS AND CABLING
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
Environmental Chambers."
1.4
A.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
Construction waste shall be managed in accordance with provisions of Section 017419
"Construction Waste Management and Disposal". Documentation shall be submitted
to satisfy the requirements of that Section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
SLEEVES
Wall Sleeves:
1.
2.
Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc
coated, plain ends.
Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron
pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:
Galvanized-steel sheet; 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed
with welded longitudinal joint, with tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board.
C.
PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
D.
Molded-PVC Sleeves: With nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
E.
Molded-PE or -PP Sleeves: Removable, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer
surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
F.
Sleeves for Rectangular Openings:
1.
2.
Material: Galvanized sheet steel.
Minimum Metal Thickness:
a.
b.
2.2
A.
For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270
mm) and with no side larger than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be
0.052 inch (1.3 mm).
For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches (1270 mm) or more
and one or more sides larger than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be
0.138 inch (3.5 mm).
SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS
Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space
between sleeve and raceway or cable.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
260544-2
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260544
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL
RACEWAYS AND CABLING
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
3.
4.
2.3
A.
Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
CALPICO, Inc.
Metraflex Company (The).
Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
Proco Products, Inc.
Link-Seal.
or approved equal.
Sealing Elements: [EPDM] [Nitrile (Buna N)] rubber interlocking links shaped to
fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size
of pipe.
Pressure Plates: [Carbon steel] or [Stainless steel].
Connecting Bolts and Nuts: [Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating,]
[Stainless steel] of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing
elements.
SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS
Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for
embedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber waterstop collar
with center opening to match piping OD.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a.
b.
2.4
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
Presealed Systems.
or approved equal.
GROUT
A.
Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in
non-fire-rated walls or floors.
B.
Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting,
dry, hydraulic-cement grout.
C.
Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
D.
Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
2.5
A.
SILICONE SEALANTS
Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric
sealants of grade indicated below.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
260544-3
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260544
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL
RACEWAYS AND CABLING
1.
2.
3.
B.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other
horizontal surfaces that are not fire rated.
Sealant shall have VOC content of g/L or less when calculated according to 40
CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile
Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental
Chambers."
Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed,
expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A.
Comply with NECA 1.
B.
Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations.
C.
Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and
Masonry-Unit Floors and Walls:
1.
Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors:
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint
sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with
requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material
solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed
surfaces smooth; protect material while curing.
Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved
opening.
Size pipe sleeves to provide [1/4-inch (6.4-mm)] annular clear space between
sleeve and raceway or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed [or unless
seismic criteria require different clearance].
Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings
are used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for
mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting.
Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors [2 inches
(50 mm)] above finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors.
Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:
1.
2.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular
sleeved opening.
Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board
260544-4
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260544
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL
RACEWAYS AND CABLING
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
assemblies.
E.
Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with
flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.
F.
Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using [steel] [cast-iron]
pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch
(25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve
seals.
G.
Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves.
Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between raceway or
cable and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.
3.2
SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A.
Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at
raceway entries into building.
B.
Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for
raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve.
Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or
cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements
to expand and make watertight seal.
3.3
SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION
A.
Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.
B.
Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs
and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.
C.
Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.
D.
Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT
4.1
A.
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
No separate measurement shall be made for work under this Section.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
260544-5
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260544
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL
RACEWAYS AND CABLING
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
PART 5 - PAYMENT
5.1
A.
PAYMENT
No separate payment will be made for work under this Section. The cost of the work
described in this Section shall be included in the Lump Sum Contract price.
END OF SECTION 260544
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
260544-6
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260550
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
1.3
A.
Identification for raceways.
Identification of power and control cables.
Identification for conductors.
Underground-line warning tape.
Warning labels and signs.
Instruction signs.
Equipment identification labels.
Miscellaneous identification products.
Alternates: Refer to Division 01 Section 012300 "Alternates" for description of Work in
this Section affected by alternates.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.
1.
Include data substantiating that materials comply with requirements.
B.
Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style,
mounting provisions, and graphic features of identification products.
C.
Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system
components used in identification signs and labels.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with ANSI A13.1[and IEEE C2].
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
C.
Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
260553-1
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260550
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
D.
Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.
E.
Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives,
and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.
1.5
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with
requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop
Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance
Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use
consistent designations throughout Project.
B.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting
of surfaces where devices are to be applied.
C.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.
D.
Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
1.6
A.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
Construction waste shall be managed in accordance with provisions of Section 017419
"Construction Waste Management and Disposal". Documentation shall be submitted to
satisfy the requirements of that Section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A.
Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length
of color field for each raceway size.
B.
Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at More Than 600 V:
1.
2.
Black letters on an orange field.
Legend: "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch
(75-mm) high letters on 20-inch (500-mm) centers.
C.
Tape and Stencil for Raceways Carrying Circuits More Than 600 V: 4-inch (100-mm-)
wide black stripes on 10-inch (250-mm) centers diagonally over orange background
that extends full length of raceway or duct and is 12 inches (300 mm) wide. Stop
stripes at legends.
D.
Pre-Printed Tags: Polyester tag, [0.010 inch (0.25 mm)] [0.015 inch (0.38 mm)]
<Insert dimension> thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for
attachment to conductor or cable.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
260553-2
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260550
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
1.
2.2
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker
recommended by printer manufacturer.
POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A.
Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length
of color field for each raceway and cable size.
B.
Pre-Printed Tags: Polyester tag, [0.010 inch (0.25 mm)] [0.015 inch (0.38 mm)]
<Insert dimension> thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for
attachment to conductor or cable.
1.
Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker
recommended by printer manufacturer.
C.
Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic
sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of cable it identifies and to stay in place by
gripping action.
D.
Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic
sleeve, 2 inches (50 mm) long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or
cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
2.3
CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A.
Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils
(0.08 mm) thick by 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide.
B.
Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weatherand chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing
ends of legend label.
C.
Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic
sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay
in place by gripping action.
D.
Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic
sleeve, 2 inches (50 mm) long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or
cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
E.
Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit
identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
F.
Pre-Printed Tags: Polyester tag, [0.010 inch (0.25 mm)] [0.015 inch (0.38 mm)]
<Insert dimension> thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for
attachment to conductor or cable.
1.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker
recommended by printer manufacturer.
260553-3
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260550
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
2.4
A.
2.5
A.
FLOOR MARKING TAPE
2-inch (50-mm) wide, 5-mil (0.125-mm) pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with black and
white stripes and clear vinyl overlay.
UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE
Tape:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5.
Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE,
Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE,
COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE,
Tag:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to
identify and locate underground electrical [and communications] utility lines.
Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial
operations.
Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading
when exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly
found in soils.
Color and Printing:
1.
2.
3.
C.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
Detectable three-layer laminate, consisting of a printed pigmented polyolefin film,
a solid aluminum-foil core, and a clear protective film that allows inspection of the
continuity of the conductive core, bright-colored, [continuous-printed on one
side with the inscription of the utility, ]compounded for direct-burial service.
Overall Thickness: 5 mils (0.125 mm).
Foil Core Thickness: 0.35 mil (0.00889 mm).
Weight: 28 lb/1000 sq. ft. (13.7 kg/100 sq. m).
3-Inch (75-mm) Tensile According to ASTM D 882: 70 lbf (311.3 N), and 4600
psi (31.7 MPa).
Tag: [Type IID] <Insert drawing designation>:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
Reinforced, detectable three-layer laminate, consisting of a printed pigmented
woven scrim, a solid aluminum-foil core, and a clear protective film that allows
inspection of the continuity of the conductive core, bright-colored,
[continuous-printed on one side with the inscription of the utility,
]compounded for direct-burial service.
Overall Thickness: 8 mils (0.2 mm).
Foil Core Thickness: 0.35 mil (0.00889 mm).
Weight: 34 lb/1000 sq. ft. (16.6 kg/100 sq. m).
3-Inch (75-mm) Tensile According to ASTM D 882: 300 lbf (1334 N), and
12,500 psi (86.1 MPa).
260553-4
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260550
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
2.6
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS
A.
Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
B.
Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive
adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to
equipment unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Baked-Enamel Warning Signs:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Preprinted 20 gauge steel signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors,
legend, and size required for application.
1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting.
Nominal size, 14 by 10 inches (360 mm by 250 mm) unless 7 by 10 inches (180
by 250 mm) is the largest size that can be applied where needed.
Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs:
1.
2.
Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with
0.0396-inch (1-mm) galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size
required for application.
1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting.
E.
Nominal size, 14 by 10 inches (360 mm by 250 mm) unless 7 by 10 inches (180 by 250
mm) is the largest size that can be applied where needed.
F.
Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
G.
Plasticized Tags:
1.
2.7
A.
Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."
Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN
FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36
INCHES (915 MM)."
"XXXX VOLTS"
"KEEP AWAY"
"BURIED CABLE"
"DO NOT TOUCH SWITCH"
Manufacturer's standard preprinted or partially preprinted accident-prevention
and operational tags, on plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for
writing, approximately 3-1/4-inch x 5-5/8-inch, with brass grommets and wire
fasteners, and with appropriate preprinted wording including large-size primary
wording, including but not limited to the following legends: "DANGER",
"CAUTION"," DO NOT OPERATE".
INSTRUCTION SIGNS
Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick for
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
260553-5
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260550
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
signs up to 20 sq. inches (129 sq. cm) and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick for larger sizes.
1.
2.
3.
Engraved legend with [black letters on white face] .
Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.
Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable
equipment.
B.
Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent
process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).
C.
Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by
thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10
mm). Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.
2.8
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS
A.
Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black letters on white background, by
thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 1/4 inch (7 mm).
B.
Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black letters
on white background, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height
shall be 1/4 inch (7 mm). Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal
for label.
C.
Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic, or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed,
with black letters on white background. Minimum letter height shall be 1/4 inch (7 mm).
D.
Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw
mounting. Black letters on a white background. Minimum letter height shall be 1/4 inch
(7 mm).
E.
Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, [black] ink or paint. Minimum letter
height shall be [1 inch (25 mm)]
F.
Emergency Equipment labels shall be white letters on red background..
G.
Provide nameplates with a minimum letter height as indicated below. Examples are
given below for the size of letters to use for a given application and this not a list of the
equipment to be identified. All equipment is required to be identified.
1.
2.
3.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
For equipment designation: switchboards and motor control centers: 1/2 inch,
panel boards: 1/4 inch. For voltage, bus ampacity, feeder source, and circuit
number: 1/8 inch.
Individual circuit breakers and or motor starters in motor control centers: For
equipment designation and section number: 1/4 inch, for load served and
location of load: 1/8 inch. Inside the door, a typed label shall provide complete
motor data including nameplate horsepower, full load amperes, code letter,
service factor, and voltage/phase rating.
Individual breakers in switchgears and switchboards: for breaker number
260553-6
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260550
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
2.9
A.
General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self-extinguishing, one piece, self-locking,
Type 6/6 nylon.
3.
3.
3.
4.
A.
Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm).
Tensile Strength at 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi
(82.7 MPa).
Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C).
Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self-extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, self-locking.
1.
2.
2.10
Minimum Width: 1/8 inch (3 mm).
Tensile Strength at 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi
(82.7 MPa).
Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C).
UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior
sunlight, self-extinguishing, one piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon.
1.
2.
C.
(address number) and equipment designation; 1/4 inch, for breaker frame size
and trip setting; 1/8 inch
Individual circuit breaker and spaces in panel boards: for numbers (section
number) 1/4 inch.
Individual circuit breakers in distribution panel boards: 1/4 inch for panel being
fed and 1/8 inch for its location.
Transformers: 1/4 inch for equipment designation and size; 1/8 inch for primary
and secondary voltages, primary source and circuit number, secondary load and
its location.
Individual remote indicating lights, meters, instruments, and control switches: 1/8
inch, indicate unit, equipment, or fire detector being monitored and condition
indicated by illumination.
Individual switches and pilots: 1/8 inch, identify mechanical unit being served.
Disconnects, relay panels, lighting contactors: 1/4 inch for voltage and source
circuit number.
CABLE TIES
1.
2.
B.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm).
Tensile Strength at 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi
(48.2 MPa).
UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0.
Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284 deg F (Minus 46 to plus 140 deg C).
MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for paint materials
and application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and
location (exterior or interior).
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
260553-7
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260550
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
B.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel
machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.
B.
Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient
viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
C.
Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.
D.
Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using
materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.
E.
Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical
fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate.
F.
System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each
color-coding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of
two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at
penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs,
and at 25-foot (7.6-m) maximum intervals in congested areas.
G.
Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below:
1.
2.
Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon.
In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.
H.
Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous
underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm)
below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a
common trench [or concrete envelope] exceeds 16 inches (400 mm) overall.
I.
Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for
surface preparation and paint application.
3.2
A.
IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE
Wire and Cable Marker:
1.
2.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
For wire/cables smaller than No. 2/0 use manufacturer's standard
cable/conductor markers of wrap-around, pre-numbered plastic coated type are
to be used and numbered to show circuit identification.
For cables No. 4 AWG and larger heat shrink sleeving is to be used for phase
color-coding.
260553-8
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260550
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
B.
Cable/Conductor Identification:
1.
C.
The application of cable/conductor identification, with circuit number, on each
wire / cable in each box/enclosure/cabinet is required. The identification shall
match the marking system used in panel boards, shop drawings, and contract
documents.
System Color Coding Schedule:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
D.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
Where electrical emergency power is exposed, conduit shall have “RED” stripes
on each section every 5 feet of electrical conduit (visible from the floor or above a
suspended ceiling) and within 3 feet of all equipment.) All junction or pull boxes
shall have the cover painted red.
Paging system conduits shall have “GREEN” bands, 5’ on centers for the entire
length of conduit run. All junction or pull boxes shall have the cover painted green
with the associated zone number written neatly on the box cover with permanent
marker.
Security system conduits shall have “BLUE” bands, 5’ on centers for the entire
length. All junction or pull boxes shall have the cover painted blue.
Temperature control conduits shall have “BROWN” bands, 5’ on centers for the
entire length. All junction or pull boxes shall have the cover painted brown.
Closed circuit television (CCTV) conduits shall have YELLOW bands, 5’ on
center for the entire length. All junction or pull boxes shall have the cover painted
yellow.
Fire Alarm conduit shall be a continuous red factory finish.
Concealed Raceways, Duct Banks, More Than 600 V, within Buildings: Tape and
stencil 4-inch (100-mm) wide black stripes on 10-inch (250-mm) centers over orange
background that extends full length of raceway or duct and is 12 inches (300 mm)
wide. Stencil legend "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch
(75-mm) high black letters on 20-inch (500-mm) centers. Stop stripes at legends. Apply
to the following finished surfaces:
1.
2.
3.
Floor surface directly above conduits running beneath and within 12 inches (300
mm) of a floor that is in contact with earth or is framed above unexcavated
space.
Wall surfaces directly external to raceways concealed within wall.
Accessible surfaces of concrete envelope around raceways in vertical shafts,
exposed in the building, or concealed above suspended ceilings.
E.
Accessible Raceways, More Than 600 V: Self-adhesive vinyl Snap-around labels.
Install labels at maximum intervals.
F.
Accessible Raceways, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits More
Than A, and V to ground: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl label self-adhesive vinyl
tape applied in bands. Install labels at maximum intervals.
G.
Junction and Pull Box ID: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the
following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend and
system voltage. System legends shall be as follows:
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
260553-9
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260550
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
H.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
Emergency Work: EM.
Power.
Uninterruptible Power Supply: UPS.
Fiber Optics: FO.
Closed Circuit Television: CCTV.
Paging System: PA.
Radio Frequency: RF.
Fire Alarm: FA.
Temperature Control: TC.
Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull
and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to
identify the phase.
1.
Color-Coding for Phase Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for
branch-circuit conductors.
a.
b.
Color shall be factory applied [or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8
AWG, if authorities having jurisdiction permit].
Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
c.
Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
d.
Phase A: Black.
Phase B: Red.
Phase C: Blue.
Neutral: White
Ground: Green
Isolated Ground: Green with a yellow tracer
Phase A: Brown.
Phase B: Orange.
Phase C: Yellow.
Neutral: Gray
Ground: Green
Isolated Ground: Green with a yellow tracer
Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns
for a minimum distance of 6 inches (150 mm) from terminal points and in
boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no
tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring
factory cable markings.
I.
Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, More than 600 V: For conductors in vaults,
pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use write-on tags nonmetallic
plastic tag holder with adhesive-backed phase tags, and a separate tag with the circuit
designation.
J.
Install instructional sign including the color-code for conductors using
adhesive-film-type labels.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
260553-10
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260550
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
K.
Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write-on tags marker tape to
conductors and list source.
L.
Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm,
control, and signal connections.
1.
2.
3.
M.
Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions and
terminals. Identify by system and circuit designation.
Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with
system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.
Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams,
and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line detectable warning
tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable.
1.
Install underground-line detecable line marker for encased duct bank,
direct-buried cables, and cables in raceway.
N.
Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the
direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29
CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards
and similar equipment in finished spaces.
O.
Danger Signs:
1.
P.
Critical Switches/Controls: Danger signs shall be provided on switches and
similar controls, regardless of whether concealed or locked up, where untimely or
inadvertent operation could result in danger to persons, or damage to equipment,
or damage to or loss of property.
Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting:
Self-adhesive warning labels Baked-enamel warning signs Metal-backed, butyrate
warning signs.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.
Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.
Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.
For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of
equipment including, but not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
Q.
Power transfer switches.
Controls with external control power connections.
Caution Signs:
1.
The following red caution sign is to be provided for all circuit breakers and
switchboards where turning off a circuit will automatically start an emergency
operation:
a.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
"Caution Turning Off this Circuit will Automatically Start Emergency
260553-11
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260550
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
Operation”
2.
The following red caution sign is to be provided for all automatic transfer
switches, switches, circuit breakers, equipment, and emergency panels that are
energized by the emergency power system:
a.
"Caution Automatically Energized by Emergency Power Supply System".
R.
Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and
maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction
signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment
operation. Where detailed instructions or explanations are needed, provide plasticized
tags with clearly written messages adequate for intended purposes.
S.
Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on
a red background with minimum 3/8-inch (10-mm) high letters for emergency
instructions at equipment used for [power transfer] [load shedding]
T.
Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique
designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation
and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection
equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets,
and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication,
signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own
identification.
1.
Labeling Instructions:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Equipment to Be Labeled:
a.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
Indoor Equipment: Mechanically fastened, engraved, laminated acrylic or
melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text
with 1/2-inch (13-mm) high letters on 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) high label; where
two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high. Use black
lettering on white field for normal and white letters on a red field for
emergency. Provide text matching terminology and numbering of the
contract documents and shop drawings. The sign shall include unit
designation, source circuit number, circuit voltage, and other data
specifically indicated. Also, the sign shall indicate normal source circuit
number ("Fed from . . .") and emergency source circuit number when the
equipment is a transfer switch or fed directly from a transfer switch.
Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label
Stenciled legend 4 inches (100 mm) high.
Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those
appropriate for viewing from the floor.
Fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the
NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure.
Panelboards: include main bus ampacity on sign.Typewritten directory of
circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard
260553-12
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260550
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
u.
v.
w.
x.
y.
z.
aa.
bb.
cc.
dd.
3.
3.3
A.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
identification shall be [self-adhesive, engraved] [engraved], laminated
acrylic or melamine label.
Enclosures and electrical cabinets.
Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.
Switchgear.
Switchboards.
Disconnect switch.
Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for
the transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the
secondary.
Substations.
Emergency system boxes and enclosures.
Motor-control centers.
Enclosed switches.
Selector switches, indicating lights. (Circuit number and voltage not
required on sign).
Enclosed circuit breakers.
Enclosed controllers.
Variable-speed controllers.
Push-button stations.
Power transfer equipment.
Contactors.
Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices.
Battery-inverter units.
Battery racks.
Power-generating units.
Monitoring and control equipment.
UPS equipment.
Telephone cabinets and switching equipment. (Circuit number and voltage
not required on sign.)
Fire alarm panels.
Security monitoring master station.
Relays
Lighting contactors
Individual distribution circuit breakers
All panel boards shall have a typed panel schedule indicating the date,
contractor, type of equipment served, and its location.
ELECTRICAL PANEL NAMING CONVENTIONS
Naming Electrical Panels for Grounds & Outlying Buildings
1.
2.
Use DIA utility map for main and secondary grids
Example: L-13F4TDEH1-A
a.
b.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
L-13 indicates Utility map book page location. Choices: A through FF (West
to East) and 1 through 31 (South to North).
F4 indicates Location grid on above page. Choices: A through J (West to
260553-13
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260550
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
B.
East) and 1 through 10 (North to South).
T Indicates Airline Tenant, R for Retail / Food and Beverage tenant or panel
if appropriate, or blank [no space] if DIA.
D Indicates Distribution panel if appropriate, or blank (no space) if Not
Distribution.
E Indicates panel feeder function. Choices: E (Emergency), ES (Essential
Power) or U (UPS Origin).
H indicates Panel voltage. Choices: H = 600 or 480Y/277 or L =
208Y/120 or 240/120.
1 indicates Sequence number of this panel supplied from this source.
Choices: 1…N.
-A indicates Sub-fed panel suffix, if appropriate. Choices: -A …as required.
Naming Electrical Panels for Concourse Buildings and Tunnel System
1.
Example: B-AW1TDEL1-A
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
C.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
B- indicates Concourse letter. Choices: A through C (South to North).
A indicates Floor level. Choices: T (Tunnel) or B (Basement) or A (Apron)
or C (Concourse) or M Mezzanine) or 4 (Fourth Floor) or 5 (Fifth Floor) or R
(Roof).
W1 indicates Core area. Choices: CE (Center Core East Side) or CW
(Center Core West Side) or E1 … E3 (Sub-Core Number East of Center
Core) or W1 … W3 (Sub-Core Number West of Center Core).
T Indicates Airline Tenant, R for Retail / Food and Beverage tenant or panel
if appropriate, or blank [no space] if DIA.
D indicates distribution panel if appropriate or blank (No Space) if Not
Distribution.
E Indicates panel feeder function. Choices: E (Emergency), ES (Essential
Power) or U (UPS Origin)
L indicates Panel voltage. Choices: H = 600 or 480Y/277 or L = 208Y/120
or 240/120
1 indicates Sequence number of this panel supplied from this source.
Choices: 1…N
-A indicates Sub-fed panel suffix, if appropriate. Choices: -A …as required.
Naming Electrical Panels for Terminal, AOB & Parking Structures
1.
Example: 6-11CTDEL2-A
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
6- indicates Floor level. Choices: T (Tunnel) or 1 through 11, depending
on building.
11C indicates Module designation (see Architectural designation). Choices:
01 through 15 and A through D.
T Indicates AIRLINE TENANT, R for Retail / Food and Beverage tenant or
panel if appropriate, or blank (No Space) if DIA.
D Indicates distribution panel if appropriate, or blank (No Space) if Not
Distribution.
E Indicates panel feeder function. Choices: E (Emergency), ES (Essential
Power) or U (UPS Origin).
260553-14
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260550
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
f.
g.
h.
D.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
L indicates Panel voltage. Choices: H = 600 or 480Y/277 or L =
208Y/120 or 240/120.
2 indicates Sequence number of this panel supplied from this source.
Choices: 1…N.
-A indicates Sub-fed panel suffix, if appropriate. Choices: -A …as required.
Naming Disconnects and Transformers
1.
2.
Disconnects shall have the same as the equipment they serve.
Transformers shall have the same name as the low-voltage panel they supply
power to with the extension of -X
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT
4.1
A.
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
No separate measurement shall be made for work under this Section.
PART 5 - PAYMENT
5.1
A.
PAYMENT
No separate payment will be made for work under this Section. The cost of the work
described in this Section shall be included in the Lump Sum Contract price.
END OF SECTION 260553
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
260553-15
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260583
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
SECTION 260583 - ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Electrical connections to equipment specified under other Sections or furnished by the
Owner.
B.
Applications of electrical power, control and monitoring connections specified in this
section include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
C.
Related requirements:
1.
D.
From electrical source to motor starters.
From motor starters to motors.
To lighting fixtures and wiring devices.
To converters, rectifiers, transformers, inverters, switchgear, switchboards, panel
boards, generators and similar equipment.
To grounds including ground electrode connections.
Equipment furnished in other Divisions (unless indicated otherwise).
Electrical connections for equipment, that are not furnished as integral part of
equipment, are specified in [Division 11 ] [Division 14] [Division 21] [Division
22] [Division 23] [Division 27] [Division 28] and other Division 26 sections, and
are criteria of this Section.
Refer to [Division 14] [Division 21] [Division 22] [Division 23] [Division 27]
[Division 28] sections for motor starters and controllers furnished integrally with
equipment; not criteria of this Section.
Refer to [Division 14] [Division 21] [Division 22] [Division 23] [Division 27]
[Division 28] sections for control system wiring, not criteria of this section.
Junction boxes and disconnect switches required for connecting motors and
other electrical units of equipment are specified in applicable Division 26
sections, and are criteria of this Section.
Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables".
Alternates: Refer to Division 01 Section 012300 "Alternates" for description of Work in
this Section affected by Alternates.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
260583-1
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260583
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
1.3
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
The following data shall be submitted in accordance with Sections 013300 "Submittal
Procedures" required prior to starting installation:
1.
Product Data: Manufacturer’s data on electrical connections for equipment
products and materials.
a.
2.
1.4
A.
1.5
A.
Complete wiring diagrams and/or shop drawings for installation purposes shall be
furnished under the Mechanical or other Divisions, as required by DIA Project
Manager, prior to installation.
As-Built Plans: Submit complete as-built plans of all Work, including interface with
other Work, in accordance with requirements as specified in Section 013300
"Submittal Procedures".
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Products, materials, equipment and systems shall comply with the following Codes
and Standards:
2.
3.
4.
A.
Include data substantiating that materials comply with requirements.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
1.
1.6
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
NFPA Compliance: NFPA 70, “National Electrical Code (NEC)” as adopted and
amended by the Denver Building Code and as applicable to products used and
the installation of electrical power connections (terminals and splices), junction
boxes, motor starters and disconnect switches.
IEEE Compliance: Std. 241, “IEEE Recommended Practice for Electric Power
Systems in Commercial Buildings” pertaining to connections and terminations.
ANSI Compliance: Applicable requirements of ANSI/NEMA and ANSI/EIA
standards pertaining to products and installation of electrical connections for
equipment.
UL Compliance: UL Std. 486A, “Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use
with Copper Conductors” including, but not limited to, tightening of electrical
connectors to torque values indicated. Electrical connection products and
materials are to be UL-listed and labeled.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
Construction waste shall be managed in accordance with provisions of Section 017419
"Construction Waste Management and Disposal". Documentation shall be submitted
to satisfy the requirements of that Section.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
260583-2
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260583
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
A.
Products shall be as specified in other Sections of this Division.
B.
General: Each electrical connection shall be a complete assembly of materials,
including but not necessarily limited to, pressure connectors, terminals (lugs), electrical
insulating tape, heat-shrinkable insulating tubing, cable ties, stress cones, splice kits,
termination kits, solder less wire nuts, and other items and accessories as needed to
complete splices and terminations as required.
1.
2.
2.2
Connectors and Terminals: Electrical connectors and terminals shall mate and
match, including sizes and ratings, with equipment terminals that are
recommended by equipment manufacturer for intended applications.
Electrical Connection Accessories: Electrical insulating tape, heat-shrinkable
insulating tubing and boots, stress cones, splice kits, termination kits, wirenuts
and cable ties as recommended for use by accessories manufacturers for type of
services required.
MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION
A.
Responsibility: It is the contractor’s responsibility to complete the EXHIBIT A
SCHEDULE included at the end of this Section. Reference Section 019990 "Standard
Forms". The Contractor shall include all costs and work associated with these items
in his bid.
B.
Verify location, size and characteristics of all mechanical equipment before installation
of electric service. In all cases of the installation of heating, ventilating, air
conditioning, plumbing and other mechanical equipment, the Contractor is responsible
for all revisions, changes and modifications necessary to properly supply electric
services to the equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
A.
INSPECTION
Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring and energization.
PREPARATION
Review equipment submittals prior to installation and electrical rough-in. Verify
location, size, and type of connections. Coordinate details of equipment connections
with supplier and installer.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
260583-3
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260583
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
3.3
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
INSTALLATION
A.
Use wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures encountered in
heat-producing equipment.
B.
Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquid-tight flexible
conduit in damp or wet locations. Length shall be six feet (6’) maximum.
C.
Install pre-finished cord set where connection with attachment plug is indicated or
specified, use attachment plug with suitable strain-relief clamps.
D.
Provide suitable strain-relief clamps for cord connections to outlet boxes and
equipment connection boxes.
E.
Make wiring connections in control panel or in wiring compartment of pre-wired
equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Provide interconnecting
wiring as required for a complete operating system.
F.
Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices such as
limit switches and temperature switches as required for a complete operating system.
Connect with conduit and wiring as required for a complete operating system.
3.4
EQUIPMENT CONNECTION SCHEDULE
A.
Furnish, set in place, and wire, except as may be otherwise indicated, all heating,
ventilating, air conditioning, plumbing, fire protection, and other motors and controls in
accordance with the electrical/mechanical coordination schedule. The contractor
shall carefully coordinate with work performed under the Mechanical and other
Divisions if these specifications.
B.
All line and low voltage wiring shall be installed utilizing materials and methods as
specified in the Division 26 of the technical specifications.
C.
Provide NEMA-rated motors and equipment suitable for operation on the voltage
systems as designated below, with tolerances for the allowable voltage variations
above and below the nominal:
1.
Rated Motor Voltage:
Service Voltage and Phase: 1/3 HP and smaller 1-Phase:
120/208V, 3-Phase
115V
277/480V, 3-Phase
3.5
A.
1/2 HP and Larger 3-Phase:
208V (only when 480V is not
available)
460V
INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
Electrical connections shall be installed in accordance with equipment manufacturer’s
written instructions and with recognized industry practices, and complying with
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
260583-4
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260583
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
applicable requirements of UL, NEC and NECA’s “Standard of Installation” to ensure
that products fulfill requirements.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
As a minimum: Each feeder circuit to panelboards, switchboards, motor control
centers, transformers, and 480-volt (and higher) motor circuits shall have an
insulated equipment ground conductor.
All medium voltage splices and terminations are to be made by a certified cable
splicer/terminator.
Electrical service and feeders are to be maintained to occupied areas and
operational facilities when temporary service is required during interruptions to
existing facilities. Momentary outages for replacing existing wiring systems with
new wiring systems shall be scheduled. When the “cutting-over” has been
successfully accomplished, temporary wiring is to be removed.
Splices shall be covered with electrical insulating material equivalent to, or of
greater insulation rating, than electrical insulation rating of those conductors
being spliced.
Cables and wires shall be trimmed as long as practicable and routing shall be
arranged to facilitate inspection, testing and maintenance.
Connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, shall be tightened in
accordance with equipment manufacturer’s published torque tightening values for
equipment connectors. Proper torquing tools, including torque screwdriver,
beam-type torque wrench, and ratchet wrench with adjustable torque settings
shall be used to comply with torquing values contained in UL 496A or the
manufacturer’s literature.
Identification markers are to be fastened to each electrical power supply
wire/cable conductor in accordance with Section 260553 "Identification for
Electrical Systems".
a.
3.6
Markers are to be affixed on each terminal conductor, as close as possible
to the point of connection.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
The correct direction of rotation of each motor is to be verified.
B.
Provide measured torquing value checklist with witness signature to DIA Project
Manager.
C.
Perform infrared scanning of all splices and terminations as required in Section
260519 "Low-Voltage Electric Power Conductors and Cables".
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT
4.1
A.
MEASUREMENT
No separate measurement will be made for the work specified in this Section.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
260583-5
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
260583
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
PART 5 - PAYMENT
5.1
A.
PAYMENT
No separate payment will be made for work specified in this Section, but shall be
included in the Contract Lump Sum Bid Price for Division 16 - Electrical, which price
shall include all necessary and incidental material and work thereto.
END OF SECTION 260583
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
260583-6
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
262726
WIRING DEVICES
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
B.
1.3
Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates.
Twist-locking receptacles.
Receptacles with integral surge-suppression units.
Isolated-ground receptacles.
Tamper-resistant receptacles.
Weather-resistant receptacles.
Snap switches and wall-box dimmers.
Solid-state fan speed controls.
Wall-switch and exterior occupancy sensors.
Pendant cord-connector devices.
Cord and plug sets.
Floor service outlets, poke-through assemblies, and multioutlet assemblies.
Alternates: Refer to Division 01 Section 012300 "Alternates" for description of Work in
this Section affected by alternates.
DEFINITIONS
A.
EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
B.
GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
C.
Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.
D.
RFI: Radio-frequency interference.
E.
SPD: Surge Protective Device.
F.
UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
262726-1
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
262726
WIRING DEVICES
1.4
A.
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
Coordination:
1.
2.
1.5
A.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.
Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product.
1.
Include data substantiating that materials comply with requirements.
B.
Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for
premarking wall plates.
C.
Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified.
1.6
A.
1.7
A.
1.8
A.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
Field quality-control reports.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers'
packing-label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
2.
3.
1.9
A.
Floor Service-Outlet Assemblies: [One for every 10] but no fewer than [one]
Poke-Through, Fire-Rated Closure Plugs: [One for every five] floor service
outlets installed, but no fewer than [two]
TVSS Receptacles: [One for every 10] of each type installed, but no fewer than
[two of each type]
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
Construction waste shall be managed in accordance with provisions of Section 017419
"Construction Waste Management and Disposal". Documentation shall be submitted to
satisfy the requirements of that Section.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
262726-2
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
262726
WIRING DEVICES
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following
manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
2.2
Cooper Wiring Devices; Division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper).
Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell).
Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton).
Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour).
or approved equal.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from
single source from single manufacturer.
GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA
70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
C.
Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be
substituted under the following conditions:
1.
2.
2.3
Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building
wire.
Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section.
STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES
A.
Unless noted otherwise, all general-use straight blade devices shall be gray.
B.
Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6
Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
C.
Cooper; 5351 (single), CR5362 (duplex).
Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), HBL5352 (duplex).
Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex).
Pass & Seymour; 5361 (single), 5362 (duplex).
or approved equal.
Isolated-Ground, Duplex Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA
WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
262726-3
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
262726
WIRING DEVICES
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
D.
Cooper; IG5362RN.
Hubbell; IG5362.
Leviton; 5362-IG.
Pass & Seymour; IG5362.
or approved equal.
Description: Straight blade; equipment grounding contacts shall be connected
only to the green grounding screw terminal of the device and with inherent
electrical isolation from mounting strap. Isolation shall be integral to receptacle
construction and not dependent on removable parts.
Tamper-Resistant Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1,
NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498 Supplement sd, and FS W-C-596.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.4
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
Cooper; TR8300.
Hubbell; HBL8300SGA.
Leviton; 8300-SGG.
Pass & Seymour; TR63H.
or approved equal.
GFCI RECEPTACLES
A.
Unless noted otherwise, all GFI receptacles shall be gray.
B.
General Description:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Straight blade, feed through type.
Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS
W-C-596.
Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no
longer provides proper GFCI protection.
Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
D.
Cooper; VGF20.
Hubbell; GFR5352L.
Pass & Seymour; 2095.
Leviton; 7599.
or approved equal.
Tamper-Resistant GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:
1.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
262726-4
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
262726
WIRING DEVICES
a.
b.
c.
2.5
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
Hubbell; GFTR20.
Pass & Seymour; 2095TR.
or approved equal.
SPD RECEPTACLES
A.
Unless noted otherwise, all SPD receptacles shall be gray.
B.
General Description: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 1449, and
FS W-C-596, with integral SPD in line to ground, line to neutral, and neutral to ground.
1.
2.
C.
SPD Components: Multiple metal-oxide varistors; with a nominal clamp-level
rating of 400 V and minimum single transient pulse energy dissipation of 240 J,
according to IEEE C62.41.2 and IEEE C62.45.
Active SPD Indication: Visual and audible, with light visible in face of device to
indicate device is "active" or "no longer in service."
Duplex SPD Convenience Receptacles:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
D.
Cooper; 5362BLS.
Hubbell; HBL5362SA.
Leviton; 5380.
Pass & Seymour; 5362BLSP.
or approved equal.
Description: Straight blade, 125 V, 20 A; NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R.
Isolated-Ground, Duplex Convenience Receptacles:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Description:
a.
b.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
Cooper; IG5362BLS.
Hubbell; IG5362SA.
Leviton; 5380-IG.
Pass & Seymour; IG5362BLSP.
or approved equal.
Straight blade, 125 V, 20 A; NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R.
Equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the green
grounding screw terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation
from mounting strap. Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction
and not dependent on removable parts.
262726-5
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
262726
WIRING DEVICES
2.6
A.
HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED) LOCATION RECEPTACLES
[Available ]Wiring Devices for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with NEMA
FB 11 and UL 1010.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.7
A.
Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD
6 Configuration L5-20R, and UL 498.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Cooper; IGL520R.
Hubbell; IG2310.
Leviton; 2310-IG.
Pass & Seymour; IG4700.
or approved equal.
Description:
a.
b.
A.
Cooper; CWL520R.
Hubbell; HBL2310.
Leviton; 2310.
Pass & Seymour; L520-R.
or approved equal.
Isolated-Ground, Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:
1.
2.8
Cooper Crouse-Hinds.
EGS/Appleton Electric.
Killark; Division of Hubbell Inc.
or approved equal.
TWIST-LOCKING RECEPTACLES
1.
B.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration L5-20R, and UL 498.
Equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the green
grounding screw terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation
from mounting strap. Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction
and not dependent on removable parts.
PENDANT CORD-CONNECTOR DEVICES
Description:
1.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
Matching, locking-type plug and receptacle body connector.
262726-6
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
262726
WIRING DEVICES
2.
3.
4.
2.9
A.
NEMA WD 6 Configurations L5-20P and L5-20R, heavy-duty grade, and FS
W-C-596.
Body: Nylon, with screw-open, cable-gripping jaws and provision for attaching
external cable grip.
External Cable Grip: Woven wire-mesh type made of high-strength,
galvanized-steel wire strand, matched to cable diameter, and with attachment
provision designed for corresponding connector.
CORD AND PLUG SETS
Description:
1.
2.
3.
2.10
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of
equipment being connected.
Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket;
with green-insulated grounding conductor and ampacity of at least 130 percent of
the equipment rating.
Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle
type for connection.
TOGGLE SWITCHES
A.
Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896.
B.
Unless noted otherwise, toggle switches shall be gray.
C.
Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
Single Pole:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
b.
Two Pole:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
c.
Cooper; AH1222.
Hubbell; HBL1222.
Leviton; 1222-2.
Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC2.
or approved equal.
Three Way:
1)
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
Cooper; AH1221.
Hubbell; HBL1221.
Leviton; 1221-2.
Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC1.
or approved equal.
Cooper; AH1223.
262726-7
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
262726
WIRING DEVICES
2)
3)
4)
5)
d.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Cooper; AH1221PL for 120 and 277 V.
Hubbell; HBL1201PL for 120 and 277 V.
Leviton; 1221-LH1.
Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1RPL for 120 V, PS20AC1RPL7 for 277 V.
or approved equal.
Description: Single pole, with neon-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is
"off."
Key-Operated Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
F.
Cooper; AH1224.
Hubbell; HBL1224.
Leviton; 1224-2.
Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC4.
or approved equal.
Pilot-Light Switches, 20 A:
1.
E.
Hubbell; HBL1223.
Leviton; 1223-2.
Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC3.
or approved equal.
Four Way:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
D.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
Cooper; AH1221L.
Hubbell; HBL1221L.
Leviton; 1221-2L.
Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-L.
or approved equal.
Description: Single pole, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle.
Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary-Contact, Center-off Switches: 120/277 V, 20
A; for use with mechanically held lighting contactors.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
Cooper; 1995.
Hubbell; HBL1557.
Leviton; 1257.
Pass & Seymour; 1251.
or approved equal.
262726-8
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
262726
WIRING DEVICES
G.
Key-Operated, Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary-Contact, Center-off Switches:
120/277 V, 20 A; for use with mechanically held lighting contactors, with
factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.11
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
Cooper; 1995L.
Hubbell; HBL1557L.
Leviton; 1257L.
Pass & Seymour; 1251L.
or approved equal.
WALL-BOX DIMMERS
A.
Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off
switches, with audible frequency and EMI/RFI suppression filters.
B.
Control: Continuously adjustable [slider] [toggle switch] [rotary knob]; with
single-pole or three-way switching. Comply with UL 1472.
C.
Incandescent Lamp Dimmers: 120 V; control shall follow square-law dimming curve.
On-off switch positions shall bypass dimmer module.
1.
D.
2.12
A.
Fluorescent Lamp Dimmer Switches: Modular; compatible with dimmer ballasts; trim
potentiometer to adjust low-end dimming; dimmer-ballast combination capable of
consistent dimming with low end not greater than 20 percent of full brightness.
WALL PLATES
Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
2.13
A.
600 W; dimmers shall require no derating when ganged with other devices.[
Illuminated when "off."]
Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.
Material for Finished Spaces: Type 302/304 stainless steel 0.04 inch (1mm) thick.
.
Material for Unfinished Spaces: Type 302/304 stainless steel 0.04 inch (1mm)
thick.
Material for Damp Locations: Type 302/304 stainless steel 0.04 inch (1mm) thick.
Plastic covers will not be accepted.
Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R,
weather-resistant, Type 302/304 satin stainless steel with lockable cover.
FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS
Type: Modular, recessed, dual-service units suitable for wiring method used.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
262726-9
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
262726
WIRING DEVICES
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
B.
Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling.
C.
Service Plate: [Rectangular] [Round], 302/304 stainless steel with satin finish.
1.
Plastic covers will not be accepted.
D.
Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, gray finish, unless otherwise
indicated.
E.
Voice and Data Communication Outlet: [Blank cover with bushed cable opening]
[Two modular, keyed, color-coded, RJ-45 jacks for UTP cable complying with
requirements in Section 271500 "Communications Horizontal Cabling."]
F.
Protrusion above finished floor: 0.15”, maximum.
2.14
A.
POKE-THROUGH ASSEMBLIES
Manufactures: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.
Pass & Seymour/Legrand.
Square D/Schneider Electric.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
Wiremold/Legrand.
or approved equal.
Description:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
Factory-fabricated and -wired assembly of below-floor junction box with
multichanneled, through-floor raceway/firestop unit and detachable matching
floor service-outlet assembly.
Comply with UL 514 scrub water exclusion requirements.
Service-Outlet Assembly: [Recessed type with two simplex receptacles]
[Recessed type with four simplex receptacles] [Recessed type with two
simplex receptacles and space for two RJ-45 jacks] <insert assembly
type>complying with requirements in Section 271500 "Communications
Horizontal Cabling."
Size: Selected to fit nominal [3-inch (75-mm)] [4-inch (100-mm)] cored holes in
floor and matched to floor thickness.
Fire Rating: Unit is listed and labeled for fire rating of floor-ceiling assembly.
Closure Plug: Arranged to close unused [3-inch (75-mm)] [4-inch (100-mm)]
cored openings and reestablish fire rating of floor.
Protrusion above finished floor: 0.15", maximum
Wiring Raceways and Compartments: For a minimum of four No. 12 AWG
conductors and a minimum of [two (2)] [four (4)], four-pair cables that comply
with requirements in Section 271500 "Communications Horizontal Cabling."
Entire cover assembly shall be constructed of [302/304 satin stainless steel]
[brass] [brushed aluminum]. Plastic covers will not be accepted.
262726-10
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
262726
WIRING DEVICES
2.15
A.
PREFABRICATED MULTIOUTLET ASSEMBLIES
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.
Wiremold/Legrand.
or approved equal.
Description:
1.
2.
3.
Two-piece surface metal raceway, with factory-wired multioutlet harness.
Components shall be products from single manufacturer designed for use as a
complete, matching assembly of raceways and receptacles.
Covers to be 302/304 satin stainless steel. Plastic covers will not be accepted.
C.
Raceway Material: [Metal, with manufacturer's standard finish] [PVC].
D.
Multioutlet Harness:
1.
2.
3.
2.16
A.
FINISHES
Device Color:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Receptacles: 15-A, 125-V, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-15R receptacles
complying with NEMA WD 1, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.
Receptacle Spacing: [6 inches (150 mm)] [9 inches (230 mm)] [12 inches (300
mm)] [18 inches (460 mm)].
Wiring: No. 12 AWG solid, Type THHN copper, [single circuit] [two circuit,
connecting alternating receptacles].
Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Gray
Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red
SPD Devices: Blue.
Isolated-Ground Receptacles: Orange
Wall Plate Finish: 302/304 satin stainless steel. Plastic covers will not be accepted.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless
otherwise indicated.
B.
Coordination with Other Trades:
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
262726-11
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
262726
WIRING DEVICES
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over
device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding
against outside of boxes.
Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement,
concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway
system, conductors, and cables.
Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross
a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.
Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.
Conductors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or
terminated on devices.
Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the
purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded
wire.
The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of
NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.
Existing Conductors:
a.
b.
c.
D.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.
Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign
matter.
Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large
enough.
Device Installation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that
were installed before building finishing operations were complete.
Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to
connect conductors.
Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until
the last possible moment.
Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches
(152 mm) in length.
When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap
solid conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around
terminal screw.
Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by
manufacturer.
When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits,
splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.
Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.
When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to
hold device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.
Mounting heights shall be as shown on drawings. If no heights noted, standard
device heights above finished floor are as follows:
262726-12
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
262726
WIRING DEVICES
a.
b.
E.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
Wall switches: 48"
Convenience receptacles: 18”
Receptacle Orientation:
1.
Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally
mounted receptacles install ground pin to the right.
F.
Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and
remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover
rough wall opening.
G.
Dimmers:
1.
2.
3.
Install dimmers within terms of their listing.
Verify that dimmers used for fan speed control are listed for that application.
Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to
manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions.
H.
Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension
vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches
under single, multigang wall plates.
I.
Adjust locations of floor service outlets to suit arrangement of partitions and
furnishings.
3.2
A.
3.3
GFCI RECEPTACLES
Install non-feed-through-type GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream
receptacles is not required.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Comply with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B.
Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use hot,
stamped, or engraved machine printing with black filled lettering on face of plate, and
durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.
3.4
A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Perform the following tests and inspections[ with the assistance of a
factory-authorized service representative]:
1.
2.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.
Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital
readout or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement.
262726-13
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 ELECTRICAL
262726
WIRING DEVICES
B.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
Tests for Convenience Receptacles:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.
Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is
unacceptable.
Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.
GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.
Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely
mounted.
Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the
circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective
devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning
units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.
C.
Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT
4.1
A.
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
No separate measurement shall be made for work under this Section.
PART 5 - PAYMENT
5.1
A.
PAYMENT
No separate payment will be made for work under this Section. The cost of the work
described in this Section shall be included in the Lump Sum Contract price.
END OF SECTION 262726
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
262726-14
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
27 COMMUNICATIONS
275123
EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
SECTION 275123 - EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
Section Includes: Microprocessor-switched intercommunications and program
systems with the following components:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
B.
Announcement Control System.
Software.
Server.
Workstation.
Visual Display Devices.
Monitoring and Testing Systems.
Ambient Noise Sensing System.
Flight Announcement System.
Master Emergency Communication Microphone stations.
Microphone stations.
Amplifiers.
Loudspeakers.
Conductors and cables.
Raceways.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Sections of Division 01 "General Requirements".
Sections of Division 26 "Electrical".
Sections of Division 27 "Communications".
Sections of Division 28 "Electronic Safety and Security".
C.
This section covers the voice paging system, and associated equipment for use in all
projects. The Contractor shall provide all skilled labor, material, and equipment for the
complete installation of the voice paging system as shown on the drawings and
specified herein. The extent of work shall be as shown on drawings, including
locations, elevations and details of construction.
D.
Alternates: Refer to Division 01 Section 012300 "Alternates" for description of Work in
this Section affected by alternates.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
275123-1
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
27 COMMUNICATIONS
275123
EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
1.3
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
Comply with the requirements of the reference standards noted herein, except where
more stringent requirements are listed herein or otherwise required by the Contract
Documents.
B.
A listing of the applicable reference standards is contained in Section 014225
"Reference Standards".
C.
In addition to all applicable local and state codes, the work shall be in accordance with
the latest revisions of all applicable standards and specifications, including the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.4
A.
1.5
NFPA: National Fire Protection Association.
NAB: National Association of Broadcasters.
UL: Underwriters Laboratories.
EIA: Electrical Industries Association.
NEC: National Electrical Code.
PERMITS
Any work performed on the DIA PA System shall be permitted as a 3A Permit to the
CCD consistent with Appendix K of the 2011 Denver Amendments to the 2009
International Fire Code.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Provide Submittals in accordance with requirements of Division 01.
B.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Technical data on each component.
Materials list and backbox schedule (including unique backboxes).
Include data substantiating that materials comply with requirements.
Shop Drawings: For emergency communications system. Include plans, elevations,
sections, details, spreadsheets and attachments to other work.
1.
2.
3.
Shop drawings shall be stamped by an RCCD as part of the submittal.
Shop drawing submittals shall be done on the existing DIA as-builts and clouded
to show the scope of work. Shop drawings in Auto CADD shall have project
specific layer(s) showing new work or modifications on its own layer(s) with the
project name.
Shop drawings shall be of scale suitable for use for fabrication. They shall show
materials, finishes and panel/control markings. Contractor shall make the
following shop drawing submittals:
a.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
A complete list of equipment for the systems, including that required for
items which are to be fabricated by the Contractor.
275123-2
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
27 COMMUNICATIONS
275123
EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
A complete set of detailed technical descriptions describing and illustrating
all components and materials.
A complete set of shop drawings of items which are to be fabricated by the
Contractor and/or which the Contractor intends to fabricate or has
fabricated, including but not limited to, the custom panels and receptacle
plates.
System block diagrams with provisions for entry of future test results.
Equipment rack and console layouts.
Details of cable management and termination in terminal boxes junction
boxes and equipment racks.
Wiring diagrams showing the exact manner in which the Contractor
proposes to install the system. Show all switches, modifications to
equipment, control circuits, and equipment rack layouts. Show all
equipment/apparatus items which are required for performance of the
required functions. Include the following:
1)
2)
h.
4.
5.
6.
10.
11.
12.
D.
Single-line diagram showing interconnection of components.
Cabling diagram showing cable routing.
Drawings identifying all terminals, wiring color-coding and control functions.
Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each
field connection. They shall show materials, finishes and panel/control markings.
Include scaled drawings for master microphone station located in fire operation
control centers as well as other locations as required that detail built-in
equipment.
Microphone Station Schedule including the following information:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
7.
8.
9.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
Station number.
Location.
Station type.
Station mounting.
Handset type.
IP or Analog.
Identity of associated parent station.
Equipment design considerations for future expansion, when indicated.
Description of system operation.
A complete list of equipment for the systems, including that required for items
which are to be fabricated by the Contractor.
Equipment rack and console layouts.
Zone programming table with microphone station programming for each location.
Details of cable management and termination in terminal boxes, junction boxes,
and equipment racks.
The data submitted by the Contractor shall be sufficiently detailed to enable the
Owner's Representative to determine whether or not the equipment, materials and
installation that the Contractor proposes to furnish comply with the requirements of this
specification, and whether or not the Contractor's organization is qualified by
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
275123-3
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
27 COMMUNICATIONS
275123
EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
experience, and by capability of personnel, to execute the work described herein.
1.6
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Spreadsheet of all IP devices, their functionality, model number and location with
placeholders for Owner to provide IP address, Masking, port assignment, switch name
and default gateway assignments. Also include POE power requirements and the
equipment room that the supporting network switch is located
B.
Qualification Data:
1.
C.
1.7
A.
Qualifications shall be provided for installer as required in Qualifications
paragraph 1.8.A.
Field Quality-Control Reports. Submit quality reports throughout project as decided in
Pre-Construction Meeting. Include communication room conditions, speaker testing
information, infrastructure connectivity quality and power outage coordination to
prevent power issues from damaging installed equipment.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Operation and Maintenance Data: For intercommunications and program systems to
include in operation and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in
Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
A record of Owner's equipment-programming option decisions.
Factory-prepared operation and service manual for each system.
Contractor shall provide technical information for all electronic apparatus,
including but not limited to schematic diagrams and parts lists, manufacturer's
installation instructions, operating instructions and technical specifications.
Contractor submittal shall include all system spreadsheets, as-built drawings
and, shop drawings prepared and used by the Contractor, as well as those which
were not required to be submitted for approval. This shall include, but not be
limited to, wiring diagrams, schedules for identification of building wiring and
installation details useful to a maintenance technician.
Instruction Manuals:
a.
Provide five (5) hard copies and one (1) electronic copy of an Instruction
Manual containing the following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
Table of Contents.
Instructions for operating the system in all modes of operation and
for fulfilling all functional requirements.
List of settings and adjustments for semi-fixed controls.
Manufacturer's sheets of specifications, operating instructions and
service information arranged alphabetically by manufacturer and
then by model number.
Complete detailed wiring diagrams and one-line diagrams for the
275123-4
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
27 COMMUNICATIONS
275123
EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
6)
7)
6.
Provide ten (10) hard copies and one (1) electronic copy of Tenant User
Manual. They shall include the following information:
1)
c.
b.
A.
Provide As-Built drawings.
Provide four (4) cd’s, or format as requested by DIA Project Manager with
electronic files of project information to DIA.
Provide one-half sized set to keep in the equipment room, three (3) full-size
sets and four (4) cd’s, or format as requested by DIA Project Manager with
electronic files to DIA.
Field Documentation:
a.
1.8
System block diagrams.
Equipment rack and console layouts.
System wiring diagrams.
Test reports, as specified herein.
Written warranty, as specified herein.
Asbuilt drawings in Auto CADD shall have project specific layer(s) showing
new work or modifications on its own layer(s) with the project name. The
intent is to provide a clear asbuilt of what is new, review the information and
then allow DIA to import the new layer(s) into their master ECS asbuilts.
Project Record:
a.
b.
9.
Basic description of equipment and its functions.
As-Built Documents: Two (2) weeks prior to final acceptance testing, the
Contractor shall provide two (2) sets of "as-built" prints and one (1) electronic
copy of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
8.
"as-built" system in reproducible format.
Recommended preventive and remedial maintenance.
Complete parts list.
Tenant User Manuals:
a.
7.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
Provide system drawings for each new communication room for simple
troubleshooting of system during break in period.
Provide laminated information sheets of new zone or message information
for new operating positions at the gates. Include simple microphone
station use directions.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Qualifications:
1.
2.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
Manufacturers' Qualifications: Paging control system, microphone stations,
amplifiers, ambient noise system equipment, monitoring hardware: Innovative
Electronic Designs, Inc. (IED).
Contractor's Qualifications: The ECS shall be installed by a Contractor who has
275123-5
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
27 COMMUNICATIONS
275123
EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
3.
been regularly engaged in the installation of electronic equipment for at least five
(5) years and certified to install IED Voice Paging Systems. The Contractor
shall be experienced in all aspects of this work and shall be required to
demonstrate direct experience on recent systems of similar type and size.
A resume of qualification shall be submitted with the Contractor’s bid indicating
the following:
a.
b.
c.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
2.
Contractor shall be an authorized installer and dealer of the specified equipment
with a service facility within 100 miles of the project site.
Contractor shall submit proof that the primary system programmer to be used in
the programming of the systems has attended a programming school hosted by
the manufacturer of the computerized systems to be provided under this section
within the past two years. Attendance shall have been within one (1) year prior
to the date of project notice to proceed.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended
location and application.
Comply with NFPA 70.
Microprocessors, transistors, capacitors, resistors, integrated circuits, printed
circuit boards and other components shall not be operated to exceed their rated
values. Design system for 24-HR continuous operation.
Provide a written two (2) year warranty, signed by the Contractor, due on the
date of the final acceptance.
Include the following provisions:
a.
b.
c.
A.
A list of recently completed projects of similar type and size with contact
names and telephone numbers for each.
A technical resume of experience for the Contractor’s Engineer and on-site
installation foreman who will be assigned to this project.
Similar documentation will be required of any subcontractor who will assist
the Contractor in performance of this work. All proposed subcontractors
must demonstrate equal or superior experience or technical qualifications to
the Special Systems Contractor in order to contract for any part of the
installation or testing of the system.
Warranty:
1.
1.9
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
Warrant all equipment and the installation to be free of faulty workmanship.
Warrant all components, including solid state devices, to be free of defects
for a period of two (2) years from the date of final acceptance.
Paint and exterior finishes, fuses and lamps are excluded from the above
warranty, except when damage or failure results from defective materials or
workmanship covered by the warranty.
COORDINATION
Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted speaker and ambient noise
sensor microphones with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
275123-6
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
27 COMMUNICATIONS
275123
EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition
assemblies.
B.
1.10
Coordinate installation with existing DIA Fiber Optics network(s), and all other existing
DIA systems. Notify DIA Project Manager promptly of any conflicts that are identified.
EXTRA STOCK
A.
Contractor shall supply spare parts to the Owner in the amount of 10% of the
equipment installed under this contract or one of each item, whichever is greater.
B.
All spare stock shall be delivered in the manufacturer’s standard shipment packaging
and turned over to the DIA Project Manager, and each item shall be clearly identified
as to the package contents and what project or area the item was used. Speaker
types used that are not listed shall be provided with a unique identifier. Include the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
1.11
A.
Storage cabinets.
Controller Plug-in Cards (each type).
Microphone Stations (of each type, Podium, Jetway, Main).
Microphone Handsets.
Type S1 Loudspeaker.
Type S2 Loudspeaker.
Type S3 Loudspeaker.
Type S4 Loudspeaker.
Type S5 Loudspeaker High Frequency Horn Driver Diaphragm Replacement
Kits.
Type S5 Loudspeaker 10-inch Midrange Cone Drivers.
Type S6 Loudspeaker.
Type S7 Loudspeaker.
Type S8 Loudspeaker.
Type S9 Loudspeaker.
Type S10 Loudspeaker.
Type S11 Loudspeaker.
Other type of loudspeakers.
Amplifier Cards (of each type used).
Fuses (of each type/size used in system).
Connectors (of each type used in system).
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
Construction waste shall be managed in accordance with provisions of Section 017419
"Construction Waste Management and Disposal". Documentation shall be submitted
to satisfy the requirements of that Section.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
275123-7
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
27 COMMUNICATIONS
275123
EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
All materials, equipment and apparatus provided shall be new and of the latest design
or model offered for sale by the manufacturer.
B.
Acceptability for use in the systems shall be determined by the DIA Project Manager.
Such items shall be installed only after receipt of written approval of the DIA Project
Manager.
2.2
A.
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
The equipment shall be designed and constructed to operate successfully at the rated
values under the following environmental conditions:
1.
2.
3.
2.3
Location: (Indoors/Outdoors).
Altitude: 5,500 feet (1677 m) above sea level.
Ambient Temperature Range: Minus 30 deg F (minus 35 deg C) to 120 deg F
(49 deg C).
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Components provided under this Contract shall be compatible with and connected to
the existing Innovative Electronic Designs, Inc. (IED, Inc.) IED 500 Mainframe located
in the center core of each concourse, Concourse B RJ facility, South Terminal, and
and Room 45B08 in the Terminal.
B.
Remote amplification rooms shall be configured to match existing rooms.
C.
The Emergency Communications System (ECS) provides paging and background
music to all public areas of the airport facilities with the exception of the existing AGTS
platforms which the IED system interfaces through the existing train announcement
system. A line level output and dry contact closure cause tenant sound system
announcements to mute and allow an emergency message to be sent. Voice paging
must be provided to all non-public support areas and parking areas. The system is
used for general announcements and emergency announcements throughout
Concourses A, B, and C, Terminal, AGTS Tunnel, Office Tower and Central Plant.
D.
The emergency announcements functions of the system provide audio evacuation
messaging and announcements for the airport. All changes to the system shall be
coordinated with the airport and Denver Fire Department before the work begins. A
pre-construction meeting shall be required to coordinate outages, schedules, hours of
work, backup plans, system faults and system sets and all other aspects of the work.
All ECS projects require Fire Alarm Permits as per article 1.4.
E.
The system provides ambient noise sensors and monitoring which allow automatic
level control of individual loudspeaker zones located in public areas.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
275123-8
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
27 COMMUNICATIONS
275123
EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
F.
The monitor/test system is capable of monitoring and/or testing all audio or DC signal,
speaker level outputs, or system wiring to insure integrity and reliable operation. All
line-level zone inputs and outputs, equalizer inputs and outputs, and amplifier inputs
and outputs must be monitored for correct operation.
G.
The ECS shall be integrated with and supplement the facility Fire Alarm System (FAS).
The interface with the FAS will enable the use of the ECS’s power amplifiers, and
loudspeakers in public areas. The FAS provides the messages via FAS contact
closures that enable the ECS to broadcast incident-specific messages into
pre-designated audio zones.
H.
The output of each amplifier must go through a terminal cabinet. This network allows
loudspeaker loads to be disconnected from the amplifier outputs for manual
measurement of load impedances by maintenance personnel. This shall serve as a
demarcation point for trades to test their portion of the work independent of each other.
I.
All loudspeakers operate on a 70 Volt distributed system. The loudspeakers shall be
grouped in modular zones allowing maximum flexibility for paging area assignment.
Loudspeaker types shall match DIA current standards to the greatest extent possible
allowing existing service stock to be utilized.
J.
All Podium microphone stations must be manufactured by IED, Inc., and equipped with
microphone, twelve-button control input, alphanumeric display or LCD display, and
accept up to three optional slave microphone handset stations. Airline Ticketing
counters and Baggage Claim Office microphone stations must be equipped with a
single microphone handset, twelve-button control input and alphanumeric or LCD
display. Jetway microphones shall be either a single handset microphone station with
limited four-button control and status indicators or, a sidekick microphone handset
station which is connected to the Podium microphone station. Match existing
configurations for operator continuity between areas.
K.
All microphone stations, ambient noise sensors, and loudspeakers shall be hardwired
to the local P.A. Rooms. Local P.A. Rooms within a building are interconnected via
copper and fiber-optic cable to the building ECS Control Room. Spare copper and
fiber-optic cable for new installations may not exist. Contractor to verify the existence
of available cable and cable raceways/conduit. Verify cable requirements with the
understanding that fiber optic cabling used for the system is a hardened, redundant
cable infrastructure designated as the part of the fire alarm infrastructure .
L.
Network Equipment and Design (Directions to Designers) Designers shall meet with
DIA Technologies network engineers to determine specific network equipment,
architecture and attachment points that are specific to the Project. The DIA network
engineers shall provide a specific bill of material for the ECS network expansion
including manufacturer, model number and description for each device. The DIA
network engineers shall also work with the designer to create a diagram showing fiber
interconnections between new network devices and attachment points to the existing
ECS network. The architecture of the ECS equipment shall be shown on the contract
drawings including uplinks to specific ports in the existing ECS network. The network
bill of material shall be included in the Part 2 Products section of this Section. First
year Cisco SmartNet coverage shall be included for all devices not covered under
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
275123-9
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
27 COMMUNICATIONS
275123
EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
Cisco’s limited lifetime warranty. No substitutions shall be allowed unless approved
by DIA Technologies. Designer shall instruct Contractor to deliver Switches and other
network equipment to DIA Technologies with signed receipt. DIA Technologies shall
configure this equipment, label equipment with switch names and place equipment
back in original factory boxes. City asset tags shall be applied to equipment where
applicable. Once configuration work is complete, the Contractor shall pick up the
equipment and provide a signed receipt to DIA Technologies network staff. The
Contractor shall then install the equipment in the relevant room(s) and interconnect the
equipment as indicated in the architecture diagram in the contract drawings.
M.
DIA Network Engineer will inspect the installed equipment and activate ports to join
the new network equipment to the production ECS network. Once this occurs the DIA
Technologies network staff will operate and maintain the new devices as an integral
part of the production ECS network.
N.
Terminal cabinets are and shall be used for breakout of speaker wiring home to the
equipment racks.
O.
Tenant ECS requirements:
Refer to Emergency Voice Paging System Tenant
Revision 275114. It is mandatory for at least one loudspeaker be located in every
room and corridor with uniform coverage required in larger spaces.
P.
Visual Information System (VIS) shall be provided as required. VIS shall provide
visual features of the system to be utilized for Visual paging, way finding, advertising,
Emergency visual communications, Flight Information System, Train Information
Display System, baggage information display systems and gate information display
systems.
Q.
Flight Announcement System (FAS) shall be provided as required. System shall
interface to Owner provided AIDX feed for data to populate the Flight Announcement
System with information to automatically or manually announce flight messages at
gate areas. System shall support Visual paging and graphics that are synchronized
with the announcement in multiple languages as identified in these specifications.
2.4
A.
SYSTEM OPERATION
The following functional capabilities are required for the DIA ECS:
1.
2.
3.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
The system is capable of automatic or manual audible testing of microphone
inputs, IED headend audio outputs, ambient noise sensor frame outputs,
equalizer outputs amplifiers and loudspeaker systems.
In all Public Areas, the system has the capability of sensing ambient noise sound
levels and adjusting loudspeaker zone signal levels up or down accordingly to
maintain good speech intelligibility.
All inputs and outputs shall be monitored for correct operation. Audio levels of
each logical system parameter shall be monitored including but not limited to
Microphone Stations, DSP, Amplifiers, Speaker lines with impedance and ground
faults, and ambient noise system. Other data information of equipment and
power monitoring shall be included in monitoring when available. All detected
275123-10
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
27 COMMUNICATIONS
275123
EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
faults shall be displayed on the ECS standard and remote CPU’s.
2.5
ANNOUNCEMENT CONTROL SYSTEM
A.
The ACS shall provide system setup, control and messaging for the PA system and
integrate with the existing systems at DIA in order to provide a fully functioning and
monitored system.
B.
ACS shall be capable of managing 240 microphone stations and 65,536 zone outputs
per unit.
C.
ACS shall provide 8 x 8 message system expandable to 64 x 64 of pre-recorded
messages via the use of additional message controller(s).
D.
ACS shall provide up to 180 simultaneous announcements and messages over a
single LAN or VLAN.
E.
ACS shall provide the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
F.
Manufacturer:
1.
2.
2.6
A.
IED 1100 0r 1200 GlobalCom with vACS1000 Software. Include IED Lifeline
Backup GlobalCom for each primary Globalcom.
or approved equal.
DIGITAL AUDIO BRIDGE (DAB)
The DAB shall provide Cobranet audio to two separate networks. The DAB shall
include:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Fully redundant architecture over standard LAN.
System backup and restoration configuration files.
Built-in wizards for initial setup.
Integrated visual paging support.
Seamless integration to legacy 510/520ACS.
Event messaging allowing multiple actions or events to be triggered.
Multi-Language support for different language packages or second language
requirements as defined in the specification.
Redundant connections for both networks.
8 channels of bidirectional Cobranet audio.
Cobranet expansion beyond layer 2 network.
Manufacturer:
1.
2.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
IED 100DAB.
Or approved equal
275123-11
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
27 COMMUNICATIONS
275123
EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
2.7
A.
AMBIENT NOISE SENSING SYSTEM
Ambient Noise Sensor Collector shall be provided for noise sensor termination from
the field devices. Collector shall be used with Titan 9160 amplifier system exclusively.
Collector shall:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Be PoE device or connect to local 48Vdc power supply.
Connect 32 ambient noise sensors on each frame.
1 RU and rack mountable.
Manufacturer:
1.
2.
2.8
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
IED T9032NS with IED 540S-2 Sensor on 2-Gang Plate.
or approved equal.
AUTOMATIC TEST AND MONITOR SYSTEM (New System)
A.
The Automatic Test and Monitor System shall provide for self-diagnostics that operate
in real time under software control. This self-testing shall include testing of logic,
audio operation, power supplies and power amplifiers. This test shall be automatic
and utilize only one system as the interface for the test. Results shall be logged on the
PC and a fault list generated that can be printed for the Owner Maintenance staff.
B.
System shall report results of actual audio signals being routed through the entire
system as well as speaker impedance load changes, speaker ground faults and End of
Line speaker faults.
C.
System faults shall be reported through software with clearly labeled information and
through external interfaces to other systems, via RSS feeds, contact closures or
network messages.
D.
System shall collect information from internal IED test and monitoring devices in
hardware and report faults or settings.
E.
System shall allow circuit testing and reset of corrected fault.
F.
Manufacturer:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.9
A.
610 Monitor/Test Software for the system server.
596SGFI Dual Channel sensors for speaker lines.
596EOL Speaker end-of-line sensor as required by Designer.
or approved equal.
MICROPHONE PAGING STATIONS (New Installations)
General:
1.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
Microphone stations shall originate announcements into zone groups as
determined by the DIA Project Manager. Any microphone page station shall be
275123-12
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
27 COMMUNICATIONS
275123
EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
2.
capable of being programmed into any zone group. Microphone stations shall
be capable, when so programmed, of making emergency zone group
announcements, terminal zone group announcements, local zone group
announcements, and multi-local group announcements. When so programmed,
they shall also be capable of performing any or all of the control functions for
pre-recorded and assembled messages. These control functions shall include
initiating a playback sequence, interrupting a playback sequence, recording a
message, monitoring a message, or playing back a message to its own multi
local group, or to a terminal zone group instead of to the zone map assigned to
that message. The microphone stations shall include a microphone; either
handheld, handset or gooseneck-mounted type. Each microphone station shall
have buttons for zone group selection to activate that microphone station for
announcements into pre-programmed zones. Green and Red LED’s shall
indicate ready or busy respectively. Any 5 second pause after the green LED
has illuminated shall terminate the announcement. Each station shall include its
own microphone preamplifier, test oscillator, compressor, and balanced output
line amplifier for driving long lines without appreciable high frequency loss. The
ACS microprocessor, under software control shall continuously interrogate all
active microphone and telephone page stations for requests.
Specifications – Total System, Direct Microphone Station input to Zone Output:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
B.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
Frequency Response: 0.5dB 20Hz - 20kHz.
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): < .05% @ +24dBm 20Hz - 20kHz.
Noise Referred to Input: -125dBv 20Hz - 20kHz.
Signal-to-Noise (limited by input amp): > 80dB.
Gain, Adjustable at each paging station: 65dB Maximum.
Maximum Output Level: +24.0dBm.
Normal Output Level: +2.0dBm.
High-pass filter in mic station defeated.
Full function Communication Stations: Stations shall have a 12-button keypad for
data entry, (8) soft function keys and a color graphical LCD. The station shall be a
network appliance with control and CobraNet audio communicating on the audio
network. Connection to the system shall be 100BaseT with power provided by a
PoE switch port or PoE mid span power. Microphones shall be provided as handheld
or gooseneck as required. Each microphone shall utilize a magnetic mount and
include a line amplifier in the microphone shell to eliminate microphone signal levels
beyond the microphones. Each station shall support the connection of up to three
528SK Sidekick, or 500FMC-H remote stations. Stations shall be provided in vertical,
horizontal, surface, flush, or desktop as noted on the drawings and based on the
mounting situation required.
1.
Acceptable Products:
a.
Horizontal Communications Station:
1)
2)
b.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
IED 528HFM-H.
or approved equal.
Vertical Communications Station:
275123-13
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
27 COMMUNICATIONS
275123
EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
1)
2)
C.
Acceptable Products:
a.
b.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Standard Microphone station as required.
Software GUI developed for project.
"A" panel software application for microphone zone selection and message
playback.
Message selection and de-selection.
Live page capabilities.
Match Existing Units.
Acceptable Products:
a.
b.
IED 528 series with touchscreen workstation IED 591D.
or approved equal.
Expansion Microphone Communication Station: Expansion stations shall act as an
intelligent slave station to a full function station. Expansion stations shall include (4)
soft function keys that can be programmed for operations independent of the master
station to which it is connected. This shall allow flight announcements and other cued
messages to be controlled from the expansion location. Microphones shall be
provided as handheld and include a line amplifier in the microphone shell to eliminate
microphone signal levels beyond the microphone. The station shall mount in a
standard 2-gang wall box and connect to the full function station with Cat5e cable and
RJ45 modular connectors.
1.
Acceptable Products:
a.
b.
F.
IED 528VBB or 528HBB.
or approved equal.
Master Emergency Communications Systems Microphone Station: Microphone
station shall be complete with integral 17- inch touchscreen monitor computer
workstation and graphics user interface per DIA Standards. MECSMS shall provide:
1.
2.
3.
E.
IED 528VFM-H.
or approved equal.
Microphone Communication Station Enclosures: For station mounting locations
requiring desktop, angled vertical, or angled horizontal, provide factory enclosures to
match the finish of the station. Enclosures shall be non-metallic and include rubber
feet.
1.
D.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
Expansion Communications Station IED 528SK.
or approved equal.
Rack Communications Station: Rack Communication Stations shall have a 12-button
keypad for data entry, eight (8) soft function keys and a color graphical LCD. The
station shall be a network appliance with control and CobraNet audio communicating
on the audio network. Connection to the system shall be 100BaseT with power
provided by a PoE switch port or PoE mid span power. Microphones shall be
handheld and utilize a magnetic mount. It shall include a line amplifier in the
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
275123-14
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
27 COMMUNICATIONS
275123
EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
microphone shell to eliminate microphone signal levels beyond the microphones. The
station shall include a flush speaker for monitoring selected audio. The speaker shall
be powered by an 8-watt power amplifier and include a panel volume control. The
station shall use no more than four (4) standard rack units.
1.
Acceptable Products:
a.
b.
2.10
IED 528SRM-H Rack Communications Station.
or approved equal.
EXTERNAL SYSTEM INTERFACE
A.
An external interface shall be provided to allow interfacing contact inputs or outputs
into the ACS system from the Fire Alarm System, Voice Evacuation System, or other
systems. Each interface shall provide 64 input closures and output closures or
voltage ports in groups of 8.
B.
Acceptable Products:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.11
A.
IED 508BI/O Interface Station (Existing System Modification).
or IED T9032LVIO, T9064LVIO, PoE required.
or IED T9040NLR.
or approved equal (model and quantity as required).
POWER AMPLIFIERS
Integrated Digital Power Amplifier System (IDPAS): The Integrated Power Amplifier
System shall provide DSP processing and power amplification for up to (16) zones in a
single modular mainframe.
1.
2.
3.
4.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
Digital Audio Network Interface: The network interface shall receive (32)
dynamic assigned audio channels from the ACS via the Ethernet Network.
Control for the IDPAS and monitoring shall be included on the network. The NIC
shall provide dual outputs to support a redundant network.
Zone Manager: The IDPAS shall provide zone management for (16) channels
as directed by the ACS. Channel management shall be structured to utilize the
minimum channels necessary on the network to support paging, messaging and
background music activity for any combination of zones.
DSP Processing: The IDPAS shall include digital signal processing for (16)
channels of audio. Each channel shall include (9) bands of parametric
equalization, time delay, ambient analysis control, (7) monitoring points, and (7)
testing points. Complete setup and control software shall be integrated within
the Enterprise Software and available on the network for configuring, controlling,
monitoring, and testing the DSP for each channel.
Ambient Analysis and Control: The Ambient Analysis System shall adjust signal
levels in response to either ambient noise levels or computer commands. The
system shall operate in real time and shall not be a “sample and hold” system.
The system shall include an automatic calibration sequence. All setup,
275123-15
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
27 COMMUNICATIONS
275123
EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
configuration and monitoring controls shall be software based with the ability for
multiple sensors averaged to control a single channel(s) or for a single sensor to
control multiple channels. The sensors shall utilize control signaling and levels
that allow co-locating with the speaker cable for cable routing efficiency. Three
(3) modes of operation shall be possible:
a.
b.
c.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Automatic: Changes attenuation levels in response to noise levels
reported by remote sensors.
Slaved: Changes attenuation levels based on remote sensors of an
automatic channel.
Fixed: Fixed attenuation as set by the computer and user.
Power Amplifier Cards: Each IDPAS mainframe shall be designed to accept (9)
amplifier cards. Each card shall be removable and replaceable without disabling
or interfering with the operation of the DSP or other power amplifier cards. The
amplifier cards shall be available as dual 200-watt cards or single 400-watt cards,
and shall be of a high efficiency design to maintain a minimum of 78% efficiency
at 100% output. The mainframe shall support simultaneous use of (8) amplifier
cards (16 channels) plus the hot spare card. Provide appropriate card models
as required.
Automatic Backup Amplifier Switching: The 9th power amplifier slot shall be
reserved for automatic backup amplifier switching. A matching amplifier card
shall be installed as a hot spare amplifier in the event of failure of one of the
primary amplifiers. The system shall detect a failure of an amplifier card and
shall electronically replace that amplifier without loss of service. Switching shall
result in no loss or change of source or destination routing. Detection and
switching shall take place in less than 2 seconds. A failure shall be reported
immediately to the fault logging system.
Internal Monitoring: Each IDPAS shall include an internal audio monitoring
buss with software selected switching. This monitor shall allow selection of a
monitor point from the control software to allow visual and audio monitoring of the
channel network input, channel direct input, ambient channel output, EQ output,
amplifier input, amplifier output, and speaker load monitor for each of the (16)
channels. This feature shall operate simultaneously and independent of the
automatic testing.
Automatic Testing: The automatic testing system shall locally test and process
audio test signals through the IDPAS. These tests may be done manually on
demand for any single test point as well as globally in the mainframe on a
completely automated basis during the day. The test points duplicate those of
the monitoring points above with a testing resolution of 0.5 dB.
Local Inputs: The IDPAS shall include (16) analog inputs for local zone program
sources or BGM. One channel shall be configurable as a backup emergency
input usable in the event of a network failure.
a.
Acceptable Products:
1)
2)
3)
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
Integrated Amplifier Mainframe: IED T9160L, or approved equal.
Dual 200 Watt 70-Volt Amplifier Card: IED T6472L, or approved
equal.
400 Watt 70-Volt Amplifier Card: IED T6471L, or approved equal.
275123-16
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
27 COMMUNICATIONS
275123
EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
4)
2.12
A.
The end of branch supervision module shall enhance the speaker line supervision
functions of the system. The module shall be capable of monitoring multiple end of
branch locations on a single circuit. Module shall include:
Supervision of 70 and 100 volt speaker lines without the need for a return wire.
Unique ID number for identification in the system monitoring software.
Proof that cable is intact to the end of the circuit.
Manufacturer:
1.
2.
2.13
or approved equal.
END OF BRANCH SUPERVISION
1.
2.
3.
B.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
IED T597EOB, IED T596EOL ( for end of Line).
Or approved equal.
UNINTERRUPTABLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS)
A.
Provide UPS in accordance with Section 263353 "Static Uninterruptible Power
Supply".
B.
A UPS shall be supplied for critical components of the PA system including the ACS to
insure uninterrupted service and control of the system.
C.
UPS shall be rack mounted device with four (4) hours of operation of full load and
monitor LAN connection for supervision of unit.
1.
Manufacturer:
a.
2.14
See Section 263353 "Static Uninterruptible Power Supply" for latest
standard.
VISUAL DISPLAY DEVICES
A.
General: Provide server, Visual system software, updates to Enterprise Software,
initial content, hardware and all components as required for a fully operating visual
information system based on requirements in specification and on contract drawings.
B.
System Server: Server shall provide information to visual displays through the
network. Server shall include all software and interfaces as required to access AIDX
database and operate Visual Systems. Server shall include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
Window 2008 Server software 32 bit.
Intel Quad Core processor 2.93Mhz.
Minimum 4GB- expandable to16GB memory.
Raid 5 with 1TB 7.2K RPM Sata drives.
Acceptable Products:
275123-17
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
27 COMMUNICATIONS
275123
EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
a.
b.
C.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
Dell R710 or latest.
or approved equal.
Visual Display Device (VDD) Type 1: The VDD shall be a 40- inch LCD flat screen
display and meet the following minimum specifications:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Size: 40- inch Diagonal.
Resolution: WXGA.
Pixels: 1,366 x 768.
Pixel Pitch: 0.648 mm.
Number of colors: 16.7 Million.
Contrast Ratio: 2,000:1.
Brightness (cd/m2): 700.
Response Time (ms at 25 degrees C): 8.
Viewing Angle: 89 degrees.
Acceptable Products:
a.
b.
Samsung M40C 40-inch LCD Display.
or approved equal.
D.
Visual Display Device Mount: Provide a display mount for each VDD. The mount
shall provide a secure and solid installation to minimize the chance of tampering. The
mount shall allow positioning and tilting to optimize the viewing angle at each
installation location. The mount shall provide for easy removal of the display by
authorized personnel and provide for integral installation of the DDC if applicable.
E.
Acceptable Products:
1.
2.
3.
Chief Manufacturing MCS Series Ceiling Mount, or approved equal.
Chief Manufacturing MTR Series Ceiling Mount, or approved equal.
Chief Manufacturing MAC-251 Flat Panel CPU Mount, or approved equal.
F.
Visual Display Device Controller (DDC): The DDC shall be a PC based controller
equipped to control one or two (as designated on the drawings).
G.
Visual Display Devices. Provide the most recent configuration as recommended by
the system manufacturer meeting the following minimum specifications:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Intel Pentium D Processor 925 (3.00GHz, 2X2M, 800MHz FSB).
File System: NTFS File System for all Operating Systems.
Memory: 2.0GB DDR2 Non-ECC SDRAM, 667MHz, (2DIMM).
Video Card: 256MB ATI Radeon X1300PRO, Dual Monitor, DVI to dual VGA.
Boot Hard Drives: 80GB SATA 3.0Gb/s and 8MB DataBurst Cache.
Operating System: Genuine Windows(tm) XP Professional, SP2, x32.
Removable Media Storage Devices: 24X Slimline CDRW/DVD Combo.
Acceptable Products:
a.
b.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
Dell OptiPlex Small Form Factor PC.
or approved equal.
275123-18
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
27 COMMUNICATIONS
275123
EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
2.15
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
LOUDSPEAKERS
A.
General: Loudspeaker design shall be provided to meet the requirements of the 2010
Edition of NFPA72 - 18.4.10. Match Existing speakers in areas if Project includes
additions or remodels.
B.
Type S1, Full-Range Paging Loudspeaker, Flush Mount with grille:
1.
2.
3.
Loudspeaker Type S1 shall be a 6.5- inch diameter coaxial device UL 2043with a
minimum input sensitivity of 88 dB measured at 1 meter with 1 watt input from
500 Hz to 2.5 kHz, frequency response shall be ± 7 dB, 63 Hz to 20 kHz and the
coverage angle shall be a nominal 90 degrees conical from 500 Hz to 2.5 kHz.
The loudspeakers shall be rated for 32 W minimum and shall include a 70 V line
matching transformer, with 0.5 dB maximum insertion loss over the frequency
range of 100 Hz to 15 kHz and selectable level taps at 2, 4, 8, 16 and 32 watts,
which shall be wired in parallel with the voice coil. Type S1 loudspeakers shall
be suitable for mounting in suspended tile or drywall and shall be an integrated
flush mounted loudspeaker enclosure, 8.5- inches minimum depth x 12.5- inches
wide.
These loudspeakers shall be utilized in public areas with suspended tile or
drywall ceiling height of 15 ft. or less.
Manufacturer:
a.
b.
C.
Type S2, Full-range Paging Loudspeaker, Flush Mount behind perforated metal
ceiling:
1.
2.
3.
Loudspeaker Type S2 shall be a 4- inch diameter coaxial device with a minimum
input sensitivity of 88 dB measured at 1 meter with 1 watt input from 500 Hz to
2.5 kHz, frequency response shall be ± 7 dB, 75 Hz to 20 kHz and the coverage
angle shall be a nominal 90 degrees conical from 500 Hz to 2.5 kHz. The
loudspeakers shall be rated for 16 W minimum and shall include a 70 V line
matching transformer, with 0.5 dB maximum insertion loss over the frequency
range of 100 Hz to 15 kHz and selectable level taps at 1, 2, 4, 8 and 16 watts,
which shall be wired in parallel with the voice coil. A mounting ring shall be
provided to secure the loudspeaker to the enclosure. Standard grilles will not be
used behind perforated metal. All other specified requirements apply as stated.
These loudspeakers shall be utilized in public areas with perforated metal ceiling
at a height of 15 ft. or less.
Manufacturer:
a.
b.
D.
Atlas FAP62T with integrated back can, grill and suspension system.
or approved equal.
Atlas FAp42T and support.
or approved equal.
Type S3, Two-way Curbside Paging Horn:
1.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
Loudspeaker Type S3 shall be a two-way device with a compression driver and
folded high frequency horn, coupled through a crossover network to a
275123-19
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
27 COMMUNICATIONS
275123
EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
2.
3.
horn-loaded woofer. The frequency response shall be ± 5 dB, 190 Hz to 18 kHz
with low frequency cut-off at 200 Hz. The input sensitivity shall be 111 dB at 1
meter with 1 watt pink noise input from 400 Hz to 5 kHz. The loudspeaker shall
be rated for 30 W with 250 Hz to 5 kHz pink noise signal with a 6 dB crest factor
for a period of eight hours. The low-frequency horn shall be constructed of
reinforced fiberglass and the high frequency horn of die-cast aluminum finished
in white. The horn shall produce a 63 degree horizontal by 85 degree vertical
coverage pattern at 2 kHz. The loudspeaker shall be provided with a 70 Volt
line matching transformer with 3.75, 7.5, 15 and 30 watt taps and bracket to allow
aiming. The loudspeaker shall be suitable for mounting to a 4- inch octagonal
electrical box.
These loudspeakers shall be utilized on Terminal levels 4, 5 and 6 curbsides.
Manufacturer:
a.
b.
E.
Penton MSH30T.
or approved equal.
Type S4, 12- inch Coaxial Loudspeaker:
1.
2.
3.
Loudspeaker Type S4 shall be a high quality two-way loudspeaker system,
consisting of a constant directivity horn, coaxially mounted in front of a cone
transducer. The overall frequency response shall be ± 3 dB, 100 Hz to 15 kHz
and the loudspeaker shall be rated for 150 W continuous pink noise. The low
frequency transducer shall be 12- inches in diameter with an input sensitivity of
99 dB at 1 meter with 1 watt averaged from 500 Hz to 2.5 kHz. The high
frequency driver/horn shall have a symmetrical coverage pattern of 90 degrees
between 1 kHz and 10 kHz and a sensitivity of 110 dB at 1 meter with 1 watt
input averaged from 2 kHz to 10 kHz. Type S4 assemblies shall be provided
with a passive crossover with a crossover frequency of 1.5 kHz. A 70 Volt line
matching transformer, with 0.5 dB maximum insertion loss over the frequency
range of 100 Hz to 15 kHz and 7.5, 15, 30 and 60 watt taps, shall be wired in
parallel with the voice coil. The assembly shall be suitable for mounting in a (3)
cubic foot square enclosure provided under another contract. A square 22
gauge steel grille shall be provided which can be mounted to enclosures in the
Terminal airline ticketing areas or in the Concourse ceilings.
These loudspeakers shall be flush mounted above the airline ticket counters in
the Terminal and flush mounted in the Mezzanine level ceiling structure down the
center of the Concourses at a height of approximately 32 ft.
Manufacturer:
a.
b.
F.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
Atlas 12CX with Q4812 Back box and mounting hardware.
or approved equal.
Type S5, Ceiling Loudpeaker
1.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
Loudspeaker Type 5 shall be a two–way coaxial loudspeaker with a constant
directivity horn mounted in a backcan with supports and grill assembly. Unit
shall be flush mounted in ceiling and supported with a safety cable to structure
above besides normal means and methods. Speaker shall be 92dB 1W/1M with
a frequency response of 60Hz 0- 15kHz +/- 5 dB. Speaker shall have a an
275123-20
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
27 COMMUNICATIONS
275123
EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
2.
3.
internal 70/100 volt transformer with taps of 7.5, 15, 30 and 60 watts including an
8 ohm setting.
These speakers shall be installed in new high ceiling areas in lieu of the 12- inch
speakers in the center of the concourses.
Manufacturer:
a.
b.
G.
2.
3.
Loudspeaker Type S6 shall be a high power paging horn consisting of a
compression driver and an aluminum re-entrant horn flare with a symmetrical
dispersion angle of 100 degrees. The frequency response shall be ±10 dB, 300
Hz to 6,500 Hz at the minimum, with a sensitivity of 107 dB at 1 meter with 1 watt
1 kHz input. Type S6 units shall have a power rating of 30 W and shall be
supplied with a transformer with 4, , 7.7, 15 and 30 watt taps. An adjustable
mounting bracket shall be provided which is suitable for mounting to a 4- inch
octagonal electrical box and allows aiming of the device.
These loudspeakers shall be used in the Terminal Parking Garage, the AGTS
Tunnel, Central Plant, mechanical rooms and other high noise environments.
Manufacturer:
a.
b.
Atlas AP30T with APXB-N Base.
or approved equal.
Type S7, Paging Horn with Dual Horn Flares:
1.
2.
3.
Loudspeaker Type S7 shall be a high power paging horn consisting of a single
compression driver, coupler and two aluminum re-entrant horn flares with a
symmetrical dispersion angle of 100 degrees. The frequency response shall be
±10 dB, 250 Hz to 12,500 Hz with a sensitivity of 101 dB at 1 meter with 1 watt
input swept from 500 Hz to 2.5 kHz. The loudspeakers shall have a minimum
power rating of 30 W and shall be provided with a 70 Volt line matching
transformer wired in parallel with the voice coil with 4, 7.5, 15 and 30 watt taps.
An adjustable mounting bracket shall be provided that is suitable for mounting to
a 4-inch octagonal electrical box and allows aiming of the device.
These loudspeakers shall be used in the AGTS Tunnel and in the Central Plant.
Manufacturer:
a.
b.
I.
Atlas FAP8CXT with mounting hardware.
or approved equal.
Type S6, Paging Horn:
1.
H.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
Atlas APT-34AT with APXB-N Base.
or approved equal.
Type S8, 4-inch Paging Loudspeaker, Flush Mount:
1.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
Loudspeaker Type S8 shall be a 4- inch general paging loudspeaker with a
frequency response of ±1.5 dB, 100 Hz to 10 kHz, an input sensitivity of 94 dB at
1 meter with 1 watt input swept from 500 Hz to 2.5 kHz. The loudspeaker shall
be rated for 15 W minimum and shall be supplied with a 70 Volt line matching
transformer with 0.5, 1, 2 and 4 watt taps. The insertion loss of the 70 Volt
275123-21
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
27 COMMUNICATIONS
275123
EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
2.
3.
transformer shall be 1 dB maximum over the frequency range of 100 Hz to 12
kHz. The loudspeakers shall be suitable for recess mounting in a standard
4-inch recessed mounted loudspeaker round enclosures provided under another
contract. A white, 22 gauge steel loudspeaker grille shall be provided.
These loudspeakers shall be flush mounted in suspended tile and drywall
ceilings in non-public areas of the Airport buildings.
Manufacturer:
a.
b.
J.
Atlas FC104T72 with Backcan, support mounting hardware and baffle.
or approved equal.
Type S9, 4-inch Paging Loudspeaker, Surface Mount:
1.
2.
3.
Loudspeaker Type S8 shall be a 4-inch general paging loudspeaker with a
frequency response of ±1.5 dB, 100 Hz to 10 kHz, an input sensitivity of 94 dB at
1 meter with 1 watt input swept from 500 Hz to 2.5 kHz. The loudspeaker shall
be rated for 15 W minimum and shall be supplied with a 70 Volt line matching
transformer with 0.5, 1, 2 and 4 watt taps. The insertion loss of the 70 Volt
transformer shall be 1 dB maximum over the frequency range of 100 Hz to 12
kHz. The loudspeakers shall be suitable for recess mounting in a standard
4-inch recessed mounted loudspeaker round enclosures provided under another
contract. A white, 22 gauge steel loudspeaker grille shall be provided.
These loudspeakers shall be surface mounted in non-public areas of the Airport
buildings which do not have ceilings.
Manufacturer:
a.
b.
K.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
Atlas FC104T72 with Aluminum Housing 410-4 and support mounting
hardware.
or approved equal.
Type S10, Full-range Paging Loudspeaker, Surface Mount:
1.
2.
3.
Loudspeaker Type S10 shall be a full-range device with a frequency response of
±3 dB, 80 Hz to 20 kHz and input sensitivity of 90 db at 1 meter with 1 watt input
at 500 Hz to 2500 Hz. The coverage shall be nominal 100 degrees horizontal
from 500 Hz to 2.5 kHz. The power rating shall be 100 W minimum, and a 70
volt line matching transformer with 7.5, 15 and 30 watt taps and a maximum
insertion loss of 0.5 dB from 100 Hz to 15 kHz shall be provided. The
loudspeaker shall be surface mounted and enclosed in a UL 94V-0 rated
injection molded or metal enclosure with integral metal grille and mounting
bracket to allow aiming. A cover plate for a 4- inch square electrical box shall be
provided with grommeted wire access hole.
These loudspeakers shall be utilized in the public areas of the Concourses, and
shall be surface mounted on the sides of crossover bridges and walkways where
the ceiling heights exceed 20 ft.
Manufacturer:
a.
b.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
Atlas SM52TB.
or approved equal.
275123-22
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
27 COMMUNICATIONS
275123
EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
L.
Type S11, Full-range Paging Loudspeaker, Pendant Hung:
1.
2.
3.
Loudspeaker Type S11 shall be a white 8- inch diameter coaxial device with a
minimum input sensitivity of 90 dB minimum measured at 1 meter with 1 watt
input from 500 Hz to 2.5 kHz, frequency response shall be ± 5 dB, 60 Hz to 20
kHz and the coverage angle shall be a nominal 100 degrees conical from 500 Hz
to 2.5 kHz. The loudspeakers shall be rated for 60 W minimum, and a 70 Volt
line matching transformer with 0.5 dB maximum insertion loss over the frequency
range of 100 Hz to 15 kHz and selectable level taps at 1.9, 3.8, 7.5, 15, 30 and
60 watts shall be wired in parallel with the voice coil. Type S11 loudspeakers
shall be suitable for mounting in a 8- inch suspended round pendant enclosure.
Suspension hangers shall be provided to lower loudspeaker within 15 ft. of the
floor.
These loudspeakers shall be mounted to down pipe suspended from structure
above with safety cable concealed in the down pipe in the ceiling of public areas
of the Concourses where ceiling heights exceed 15 ft.
Manufacturer:
a.
b.
M.
Atlas PM8FA-W.
or approved equal.
Type Loudspeaker <as required for the design>.
2.16
OTHER DEVICES
A.
Equipment Racks:
1.
2.
B.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
Vertical floor equipment racks shall be located in P.A. Rooms and shall be
constructed of heavy gauge steel frame with removable sides and rear door.
Racks shall be equipped with 11 gage CRS adjustable mounting rails plated,
drilled and tapped 10-32 thread on E.I.A. standard hole spacing, and shall accept
standard 19" rack-mountable equipment. Cabinet depth shall be 25-1/2" and
provide 77-1/8" rack space mounting. Racks shall allow opening on sides and
bottom to facilitate wiring of components, shall have a rear door equipped with a
cylinder lock and shall have louvered top and side panels. Base shall be tapped
to accept leg levelers, and the frame shall be finished in textured black. The top
and side panels, rear door, and all trim shall be finished as directed by the DIA
Project Manager.
Except as otherwise specified or shown, ECS equipment shall be installed in
equipment racks. Include racks for facilities for which racks are not shown on
the drawings, and provide an adequate number of sections, at all locations, for
installation of the equipment which the Contractor will provide.
Sound System Terminal Cabinets:
1.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
Wall mounted terminal cabinets shall be provided in each P.A. Room and ECS
Control Room to allow breakout of wiring from conduit to the equipment racks.
The terminal cabinets shall be 36"H by 24"W by 9"D and constructed of 14 gauge
CRS throughout. Rear section shall be of one-piece construction with all welded
275123-23
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
27 COMMUNICATIONS
275123
EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
2.
seams. Cabinet finish shall be as selected by DIA Project Manager from
standards available. Cabinet shall include AMP Flexiblocks with track and end
stops for cable termination and connection points.
Manufacturer:
a.
b.
C.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
Hoffman T series cabinet.
or approved equal.
Wiring and Conductors:
1.
Microphone and Line Level Cable:
a.
b.
c.
Microphone, line level, and ambient sensor cable, when installed in conduit,
shall be NEC Type CM cable consisting of ASTM stranded tinned copper,
22 AWG, 100% aluminum polyester foil shielded twisted pair with tinned
copper drain wire and 75 degree Centigrade rated polypropylene insulation.
The cable shall have a nominal O.D. of 0.135" with a green outer jacket,
nominal capacitance of 34 pF/ft. between conductors and nominal
capacitance of 67 pF/ft. between one conductor and other conductors
connected to shield.
Where cable is installed in cable trays, it shall be NEC Type PLTC stranded
tinned copper, 22 AWG, 100% aluminum polyester foil shielded twisted pair
with tinned copper drain wire. The insulation shall be PVC with nylon and
rated for 105 degrees Centigrade. The cable shall have a nominal O.D. of
0.201" with a green outer jacket, a nominal capacitance of 50 pF/ft.
conductor to conductor and a nominal capacitance of 90 pF/ft. between one
conductor and the others connected to the shield.
Manufacturer of all cable:
1)
2)
3)
2.
Trunk loudspeaker cable, when installed in conduit, shall be 12 AWG stranded
Green/White twisted pair.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Branch loudspeaker cable shall be 12 AWG stranded green/white twisted
pair to the first loudspeaker in the home run. No overall jacket is required.
Cable thereafter shall be sized to provide no more than 0.5 dB loss but
shall be no smaller than 14 AWG. Color code and jacket requirements
shall be the same as used on trunk cable.
Where installed in cable tray, loudspeaker cable shall be plenum rated.
Manufacturer:
1)
2)
3)
3.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
Belden.
Liberty.
or approved equal.
12 AWG Cable – Tappan PLN1202TC GN.
14 AWG Cable – Tappan PLN1402TC.
or approved equal.
Control cable shall be installed in conduit and shall be low capacitance 22 AWG
stranded four twisted pair with 100% aluminum polyester overall shield and drain
275123-24
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
27 COMMUNICATIONS
275123
EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
4.
5.
2.17
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
wire. The nominal O.D. shall be 0.325" with a green outer jacket, nominal
conductor D.C.R. shall be 24 ohm/1000 ft., the nominal capacitance shall be 15.5
pF/ft. between conductors and the nominal capacitance shall be 27.5 pF/ft.
between one conductor and other conductors connected to shield.
The installation may involve localized conditions in which metallic-conductor
cable systems will transition from conduit to tray installation, and vice versa, for
limited lengths of run. If a cable is transitioning from a room via tray into conduit
for the remaining distance of the run, the wiring should be the type rated for use
in conduit. If the majority of the cable run is in conduit, use cable rated for such
use. If the majority of the cable run is in cable tray, use cable rated for use in
tray.
Speaker Test Panels: Provide speaker circuit test panels matching existing.
Panel shall house IED speaker load modules, disconnect switch and banana jack
test points. Match existing panels including engraving. Provide one panel for
every 8 amplifier channels.
RACEWAYS
A.
Intercommunication and Program System Raceways and Boxes: Comply with
requirements in Section 260533 "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems."
B.
All cabling shall be housed in conduit raceway
C.
Provide a complete raceway system for the ECS. Emergency signal infrastructure
from Master Microphone stations or network connections for amplifier frames shall not
be allowed in cable trays. They must be provided in conduit. Raceways shall be
installed utilizing the most efficient route.
D.
Outlet boxes shall be not less than 2- inches (50 mm) wide, 3- inches (75 mm) high,
and 2-1/2- inches (64 mm) deep.
E.
Flexible metal conduit is allowed where other conduit will not suffice.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
A.
All work shall be provided complete, and the ECS shall be fully operational as shown
and described herein.
B.
Modifications and additions to the existing ECS:
1.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
Work Meeting: The Contractor shall coordinate and arrange a pre-work meeting
with the DIA Project Manager and DIA Technical Maintenance one week in
advance of the beginning of any work. The Contractor shall assure attendance
of trades installing the ECS including any electrical, telecommunications, and
audio-related trades involved. The Contractor shall present the contractor’s
construction, demolition, phasing, implementation, and testing plans and
275123-25
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
27 COMMUNICATIONS
275123
EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
schedule. Meeting notes shall be accurately recorded by the DIA Project
Manager and distributed within three (3) working days.
C.
2.
All Work shall be provided complete, and the voice paging systems shall be fully
operational as shown and described herein. DIA Technical Maintenance will
make all final connections to existing circuits.
3.
Modifications and additions to the existing ECS: Contractors must give DIA AIM
five (5) working days notice before making any connections, deletions, or
modifications to the existing sound system. DIA System Shutdown Request
form must be used for this purpose.
Electrical Related Work:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Power or ECS System Outages:
1.
3.2
Furnish and install all electrical conduit, wiring and outlets for electrical power to
paging and announcement control equipment.
Furnish and install raceway, conduit, junction boxes and for audio signal and
control wiring.
Furnish and install loudspeaker junction boxes and enclosures.
Furnish and install ground conductor from building earth ground to each group of
equipment racks in accordance with requirements of Section 260526 "Grounding
and Bonding for Electrical Systems". The insulated ground conductor shall be
installed in conduit and sized for a DC resistance of 0.1 ohm or less to ground.
For example, a 15 ft. run would be 8 AWG or larger.
Power or ECS System Outages: Any power or ECS System outages necessary
to install or test systems and/or equipment shall be coordinated with Denver
International Airport Project Manager. A written shutdown request form shall be
submitted to and approved by the DIA Project Manager two (2) weeks prior to the
shutdown.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver products to site and store and protect under provisions of Division 01.
B.
Store products in secure locations as approved and directed by DIA Project Manager.
3.3
FABRICATION
A.
Designation/Engraving: All equipment controls, receptacles and all indicators shall
have, unless otherwise noted, permanently engraved or silk screened, fully descriptive
identification labels. The resolution of silk screened labels shall not be less than
90,000 dots/sq. in.
B.
Terminals and Terminations:
1.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
Cables shall not be spliced or otherwise interrupted from termination to
275123-26
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
27 COMMUNICATIONS
275123
EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
2.
3.
termination. All cables shall have visible heat-shrink identifying markers on each
end in compliance with DIA labeling standards.
Wiring in terminal cabinets shall be tied and clamped neatly to backboards or
cable forms.
Terminal blocks shall be fully insulated, rated for the wire size to be terminated,
suitable for mounting inside an electrical enclosure and, unless otherwise
specified, be one of the following types:
a.
b.
4.
C.
2.
3.
4.
A.
Terminal strips with interposing barriers between screw terminals.
Terminal strips with gas-tight screw type clamp connectors.
Each terminal strip shall have a legibly marked permanent identification strip.
Structural Assemblies:
1.
3.4
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
Loudspeaker mounting frames and brackets shall be fabricated and assembled
in shop to the greatest extent possible. Fabricate items of structural steel in
accordance with AISC Specifications and as indicated on final shop drawings.
Provide high-strength threaded fasteners for bolted connections and comply with
AWS code for procedures, appearance and quality of welds and for methods
used in correcting welding work.
Provide holes required for securing other components or assemblies to structural
steel framing and for passage of other components through steel framing
members as shown on final shop drawings. Cut, drill or punch holes
perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame cut holes or enlarge holes by
burning.
In fabricating mounting brackets and other steel components requiring bends, the
radii of the bends shall not be less than three times the thickness of the steel
being bent.
REDUNDANCY
The PA System shall be a fully redundant system with the minimum basic
requirements of the following:
1.
2.
Redundant Globalcom equipment shall be implemented into the system for full
redundancy. Locate redundant Lifeline Globalcom as shown on contract
documents.
Utilize redundant Cobranet connections on amplifier frames.
B.
System shall be connected via a physically separated fiber optic premise wiring
system designed for the Fire Alarm System. Redundancy shall include redundant
core and intermediate switches with redundant connections to the edge switch as
shown on contract drawings.
C.
IP Microphone stations shall connect to each regional Announcement Control System
(ACS) over Owner provided network. The remainder of the ECS equipment Ethernet
connectivity shall be provided by a stand-alone Ethernet network consisting of access
layer switches, pairs of regional distribution switches and core switches. Connectivity
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
275123-27
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
27 COMMUNICATIONS
275123
EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
of access layer to distribution switches shall be done using diversely routed fire alarm
system single mode fiber provided by Owner. Inter-Building connectivity shall use
DIA Premise Wiring and Distribution System Fiber Strands.
D.
3.5
A.
Cabling required for network infrastructure shall be provided by the Owners Premise
Wiring Contractor Services (PWCS). PWCS shall be provided with the drawings and
shall then provide pricing to be included in the Project for the network cabling and
connectivity.
INTERFACES
Several interfaces to other system shall be required for both physical hardware and
software. These systems include, but are not limited to Fire Alarm System, AIDX
Database, Tenant PA systems and DIA Networks. Specific requirements for each
shall be as follows:
1.
2.
3.
3.6
A.
WIRING METHODS
Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways and cable trays except within consoles,
cabinets, desks, and counters, and except in accessible ceiling spaces and in gypsum
board partitions where unenclosed wiring method may be used. Conceal raceway
and cables except in unfinished spaces.
1.
2.
B.
Fire Alarm System Interfaces shall be connected to ACS and Globalcom
locations throughout the airport. Provide interfaces through dry contacts to allow
required functionality to occur including tenant areas. System sequence of
operation shall be defined by Section 283100 "Intelligent Life Safety Fire
Management System" and Section 283112 and the fire alarm documentation.
Critical faults from the ECS shall be faulted to the fire alarm system through the
interface.
Airport Information Data Exchange (AIDX) Database shall provide information for
the Flight Announcement System. System shall be interfaced at IED Server
locations.
DIA Networks: DIA networks work and interfaces shall be coordinated at the
Pre-construction meeting. DIA network representatives shall be available during
any scheduled work with regard to interfaces or LAN, VLAN modifications of the
PA system.
Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings.
Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Division 26
Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems."
Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train cables to terminal points with no
excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide
and use lacing bars and distribution spools.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
275123-28
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
27 COMMUNICATIONS
275123
EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
3.7
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
INSTALLATION OF RACEWAYS
A.
Comply with requirements in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical
Systems" for installation of conduits and wireways.
B.
Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows whenever possible.
3.8
INSTALLATION OF CABLES
A.
Comply with NECA 1.
B.
General Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Open-Cable Installation:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Terminate conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make
terminations only at outlets and terminals.
Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Arrange on numbered terminal strips in
junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.
Cables may not be spliced.
Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches (760 mm) and
not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks,
frames, and terminals.
Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding
manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and distribution
spools.
Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not
splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard
cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable.
Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling.
Heat lamps shall not be used.
Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunication
spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment.
Suspend speaker cable not in a wireway or pathway a minimum of 8 inches (200
mm) above ceiling by cable supports not more than [60 inches (1524 mm)]
<Insert dimension> apart.
Cable shall not be run through structural members or be in contact with pipes,
ducts, or other potentially damaging items.
Separation of Wires: Separate speaker-microphone, line-level, speaker-level, and
power wiring runs. Install in separate raceways or, where exposed or in same
enclosure, separate conductors at least 12 inches (300 mm) apart for speaker
microphones and adjacent parallel power and telephone wiring. Separate other
intercommunication equipment conductors as recommended by equipment
manufacturer.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
275123-29
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
27 COMMUNICATIONS
275123
EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
3.9
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
INSTALLATION
A.
Identification of Conductors and Cables: Color-code conductors and apply wire and
cable marking tape to designate wires and cables so they identify media in
coordination with system wiring diagrams. Clearly, logically and permanently mark
switches, connectors, jacks, relays, and receptacles.
B.
Weatherproof Equipment: For units that are mounted outdoors, in damp locations, or
where exposed to weather, install consistent with requirements of weatherproof rating.
C.
Speaker-Line Matching Transformer Connections: Make initial connections using tap
settings indicated on Drawings.
D.
Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables."
E.
Mount equipment firmly in place, including loudspeakers, amplifiers and cables in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Make fastenings and supports adequate
to support their loads with a safety factor of three. Appliances shall be mounted
independently of their attachments to the circuit conductors.
F.
Appliances subject to mechanical damage shall be suitably protected. If guards,
covers, or lenses are employed, they shall be listed for use with the appliance.
G.
Secure equipment firmly in place, including loudspeakers, amplifiers and cables.
Make fastenings and supports adequate to support their loads with a safety factor of
three
H.
Clearly, logically and permanently mark switches, connectors, jacks, relays,
receptacles, cables and cable terminations.
I.
The Contractor shall take precautions to prevent electromagnetic and electrostatic
hum. Install the equipment to provide safe operation. Provide ventilation as required
to maintain equipment within the manufacturer's specified temperature limits.
J.
Provide all cables necessary for interconnection of permanently mounted equipment.
Use terminations required to achieve full function of equipment as specified herein.
K.
Exercise care in wiring, to avoid damage to the cables and to the equipment. Make
all joints and connections with rosin-core solder or with mechanical connectors
approved for Class I wiring. Execute all wiring in strict adherence to standard
broadcast procedures.
L.
Run lines in separate metallic conduits or install cable tray dividers for microphone
level circuits (up to -20 dBm), line level circuits (up to +30 dBm), loudspeaker circuits
(above +30 dBm) and power circuits. Ground power conduits with heavy wire to the
power system ground. Use only cables which are insulated from the conduit and from
each other for the entire conduit length. Connect conduits mechanically and
electrically to the sound system ground point. Do not splice lines in conduit.
M.
The Installer shall coordinate all sound equipment panel and control locations with the
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
275123-30
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
27 COMMUNICATIONS
275123
EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
DIA Project Manager prior to installation.
N.
Speaker circuits shall be run in continuous line to provide circuit supervision utilizeing
End of Line Module.
O.
Speaker circuits, speakers, and control equipment shall be installed to meet the
pathway survivability requirements of NFPA 72, Chapter 24. Specifically, Level 1
Pathway Survivability shall be provided.
3.10
GROUNDING
A.
Ground cable shields and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize
ground loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments.
B.
Signal Ground Terminal: Locate at main equipment cabinet. Isolate from power
system and equipment grounding.
C.
Install grounding electrodes as specified in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding
for Electrical Systems."
3.11
A.
3.12
A.
SYSTEM PROGRAMMING
Programming: Fully brief Owner on available programming options. Record Owner's
decisions and set up initial system program. Provide all programming required for a
fully functioning system and associated interfaces. Prepare a written record of
decisions, implementation methodology, and final results.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Electrical/Electronic Tests and Inspections: At the job site, the Contractor shall
perform tests not conducted and certified by the manufacturer and, be prepared to
repeat any or all tests as may be directed by the DIA Project Manager during the
period of final inspection and checkout. Furthermore, the Contractor shall be
prepared to perform work required to modify the performance of the system in
accordance with this specification. Test all electrical circuits before plugging ECS
equipment into the circuit.
1.
2.
3.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
Schedule tests with DIA Project Manager with at least seven (7) days' advance
notice of test performance. Do not proceed with testing without written approval
from DIA Project Manager.
General Inspection and Adjustment: Make all measurements, and subsequently
deliver documentation, to demonstrate that all individual components, not
previously measured and certified by the manufacturer, are performing in
accordance with each manufacturer's published specifications. Specifically,
examine frequency response, total harmonic distortion and signal-to-noise ratio.
Replace any components found to be defective.
Operational Test: Test microphone stations at each area that the microphone
station is installed. Verify proper routing and volume levels and that system is
275123-31
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
27 COMMUNICATIONS
275123
EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
free of noise and distortion. Test each available message path from each
station on system.
Redundancy Test: Test redundancy and back up amplifier switching for all
redundant components including a power loss scenario. Determine that system
components are configured for automatic boot up recovery as part of redundancy
and that the appropriate files are correctly backed up for system configurations.
Distortion Test: If distorted signal is present, measure distortion at normal gain
settings and rated power. Feed signals at frequencies of 150, 200, 400, 1000,
and 2500 Hz into selected amplifiers. For each frequency, measure distortion in
the system outputs. Maximum acceptable distortion at any frequency is 5
percent total harmonics. Replace defective equipment
Acoustic Coverage Test: Feed pink noise into system. Use sound-level RTA
meter with octave-band filters to measure level at three locations in each paging
zone. Equalize and delay loudspeakers with Pink Noise and sufficient analyzer
to maximize audio quality and intelligibility in every instance. Consultant shall
spot check these loudspeaker systems with the Contractor in the field during test
out. Maximum permissible variation in level is plus or minus 3 dB; in levels
between adjacent zones, plus or minus 5 dB. Set equalization for maximum flat
response of loudspeaker system. Use filters to cut, if possible, rather than boost
frequencies. If 6dB of boost or cut is required, verify position of test microphone,
speaker polarity issues or reflections that may be skewing the test. Slight
repositioning of the test Microphone may be required
Power Output Test: If loudspeaker performance is not producing the required
and calculated level in a zone, measure electrical power output of each paging
amplifier at normal gain settings of 150, 1000, and 2500 Hz. Maximum variation
in power output at these frequencies is plus or minus 3 dB. Replace defective
equipment or verify speakers are tapped and performing correctly.
Signal Ground Test: Measure and report ground resistance at system signal
ground. Comply with testing requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and
Bonding for Electrical Systems."
Loudspeaker Line Impedance: Measure the impedance and the resistance of
each loudspeaker line leaving the sound equipment racks with the line
disconnected from its normal driving source. Maintain values within ± 10% of
the value calculated for that circuit based upon the parallel impedances of the
loudspeakers connected plus the resistance of the loudspeakers. Measure
loudspeaker impedance at multiple frequencies according to the speaker type.
Measure for ground faults on each leg of the speaker system. Correct any faults
found for both impedance and ground faults. .
Hum and Noise Level: If hum or noise is present, measure the hum and noise
levels of the overall system. Adjust gain controls for optimum signal-to-noise
ratio. The adjustment shall also be such that full amplifier output would be
achieved with O dBm input. Terminate inputs with shielded resistors of 600
ohms, and disconnect the loudspeaker lines, terminating the power amplifier
outputs with power resistors for these measurements. The load resistors shall
match the rated load impedance and output power of the amplifiers.
Power Output and Signal Level Adjustments: Adjust gain controls as for the
hum and noise level test. Set variable equalizers for flat response. Apply 1,000
Hz sinewave signal at the input tested, at a level required to produce a full
amplifier output. Use a distortion analyzer to measure the output level and total
harmonic distortion of the amplification equipment. Make all measurements with
275123-32
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
27 COMMUNICATIONS
275123
EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
loads actually incurred in system operation. Power amplifier loads shall be
resistors equal to the nominal impedance of the output terminals used in the
system.
Gain Control Settings: Establish tentative normal settings for all gain controls.
All gain controls on rack-mounted equipment shall be adjusted for optimum
signal-to-noise ratio and signal balance. Settings may require further
adjustment by the Contractor as a result of testing by the DIA Project Manager.
Programmed settings shall be recorded in hardcopy format.
Provide System Set with no faults. System shall run fault free from the
Contractors work for a minimum of 30 days with no issues for final closeout of
work.
Freedom from Switching Transient Noise: Operate all control switches and
relays, while listening for clicks and pops in the system outputs. Eliminate any
found.
Listening Tests: These tests shall include speech intelligibility surveys and
subjective aural evaluations by observers at various positions under various
operating conditions, using live speech and/or recorded music material.
Equipment Tests: Any measurements of frequency response, distortion, noise
or other characteristics and any operational tests deemed necessary may be
performed on any item or group of items to determine conformity with these
requirements. Measurements of system performance shall be made using a
calibrated ANSI S1.4, Type 1 sound level meter set for "slow" meter damping
and flat response. The microphone shall be positioned 5 feet above the floor
within the area served by the system. All interior finishes and furnishings shall
be in place, and the system gain shall be set to provide octave band levels at
least 10 dB above background noise levels in any octave band at the measuring
locations.
Identification: Verify that units and controls are properly labeled and
interconnecting wires and terminals are identified. Prepare a list of final tap
settings of paging speaker-line matching transformers.
B.
The ECS shall be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
C.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
D.
Report: Upon completion of the above tests and any necessary adjustments, submit
two (2) copies of a written report presenting test results, including numerical values
where necessary, for review by the DIA Project Manager prior to acceptance testing,
final tuning and demonstration. With this report, submit written certification that the
installation conforms to the requirements stated herein, is complete in all respects, and
is ready for inspection, testing and final tuning.
3.13
A.
STARTUP SERVICE
Engage an IED factory-authorized service representative to assist Contractor and
perform startup service and initial system programming and final commissioning.
1.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and
installation requirements.
275123-33
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
27 COMMUNICATIONS
275123
EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
2.
3.14
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
ADJUSTING
A.
On-Site Assistance: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to provide
on-site assistance in adjusting sound levels, resetting transformer taps, and adjusting
controls to meet occupancy conditions.
B.
Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within [twelve (12)] months of date of
Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual
occupied conditions. Provide up to [two (2)visits to Project during other-than-normal
occupancy hours for this purpose.
3.15
A.
3.16
A.
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
Replace defective materials and repair faulty workmanship within 48 hours of
discovery during the period of the warranty.
DEMONSTRATION
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assist Contractor and train
Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the
intercommunications and program systems.
1.
2.
B.
Train Owner's maintenance personnel on programming equipment for starting up
and shutting down, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining the system and
equipment.
Schedule training with Owner, through DIA Project Manager, with at least seven
(7) days advance notice.
Upon approval of the test report by the DIA Project Manager, and at a time established
by the DIA Project Manager, demonstrate the operation of each major component of
the system and the completed installation. After demonstration, assist as required in
the following acceptance tests:
1.
2.
3.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
Listening Tests: These tests shall include speech intelligibility survey and
subjective aural evaluations by observers at various positions under various
operating conditions, using live speech and/or recorded music material.
Equipment Tests: Any measurements of frequency response, distortion, noise
or other characteristics and any operational tests deemed necessary may be
performed on any item or group of items to determine conformity with these
requirements.
If the need for adjustment or modification becomes evident during demonstration
and testing, accomplish adjustments or alterations until the installation operates
fully in accordance with the requirement of this specification.
275123-34
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
27 COMMUNICATIONS
275123
EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT
4.1
A.
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
No separate measurement shall be made for work under this Section.
PART 5 - PAYMENT
5.1
A.
PAYMENT
No separate payment will be made for work under this Section. The cost of the work
described in this Section shall be included in the Lump Sum Contract price.
END OF SECTION 275123
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
275123-35
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
280544
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY
AND SECURITY PATHWAYS AND CABLING
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
SECTION 280544 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND
SECURITY PATHWAYS AND CABLING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
C.
1.3
A.
Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for penetration firestopping installed
in fire-resistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with
and without penetrating items.
penetration firestopping installed in fire-resistance-rated walls, horizontal
assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without penetrating items.
Alternates: Refer to Division 01 Section 012300 "Alternates" for description of Work in
this Section affected by Alternates.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product.
1.
B.
Sleeves for pathway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls
and floors.
Sleeve-seal systems.
Sleeve-seal fittings.
Grout.
Silicone sealants.
Include data substantiating that materials comply with requirements.
LEED Submittals:
1.
2.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For sealants, documentation including printed
statement of VOC content.
Laboratory Test Reports for Credit EQ 4: For sealants, documentation
indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements of the
280544-1
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
280544
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY
AND SECURITY PATHWAYS AND CABLING
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of
Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale
Environmental Chambers."
1.4
A.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
Construction waste shall be managed in accordance with provisions of Section 017419
"Construction Waste Management and Disposal". Documentation shall be submitted
to satisfy the requirements of that Section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
SLEEVES
Wall Sleeves:
1.
2.
Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc
coated, plain ends.
Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron
pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:
Galvanized-steel sheet; 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed
with welded longitudinal joint, with tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board.
C.
PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
D.
Molded-PVC Sleeves: With nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
E.
Molded-PE or -PP Sleeves: Removable, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer
surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
F.
Sleeves for Rectangular Openings:
1.
2.
Material: Galvanized-steel sheet.
Minimum Metal Thickness:
a.
b.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270
mm) and with no side larger than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be
0.052 inch (1.3 mm).
For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches (1270 mm) or more
and one or more sides larger than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be
0.138 inch (3.5 mm).
280544-2
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
280544
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY
AND SECURITY PATHWAYS AND CABLING
2.2
A.
SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS
Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space
between sleeve and pathway or cable.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
3.
4.
2.3
A.
Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
CALPICO, Inc.
Metraflex Company (The).
Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
Proco Products, Inc.
or approved equal.
Sealing Elements: EPDM Nitrile (Buna N) rubber interlocking links shaped to fit
surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of
pipe.
Pressure Plates: Carbon steel Plastic Stainless steel.
Connecting Bolts and Nuts: [Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating,]
[Stainless steel] of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.
SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS
Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for
embedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber waterstop collar
with center opening to match piping OD.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a.
b.
2.4
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
Presealed Systems.
or approved equal.
GROUT
A.
Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in
non-fire-rated walls or floors.
B.
Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting,
dry, hydraulic-cement grout.
C.
Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
D.
Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
280544-3
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
280544
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY
AND SECURITY PATHWAYS AND CABLING
2.5
A.
SILICONE SEALANTS
Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric
sealants of grade indicated below.
1.
2.
3.
B.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other
horizontal surfaces that are not fire rated.
Sealant shall have VOC content of [250] <Insert value> g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile
Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental
Chambers."
Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based, liquid elastomers that, when mixed,
expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A.
Comply with NECA 1.
B.
Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations.
C.
Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and
Masonry-Unit Floors and Walls:
1.
Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
Seal annular space between sleeve and pathway or cable, using joint
sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with
requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material
solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed
surfaces smooth; protect material while curing.
Conduits shall be secured to both sides of walls with unistrut and unistrut
clamps. Bonding bushings shall be provided on both sides of penetrating
sleeves and bonded to tray/cable ladder on both sides. Firestop between
conduits and wall.
Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved
opening.
Size pipe sleeves to provide [1/4-inch (6.4-mm)] <Insert dimension> annular clear
space between sleeve and pathway or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed[
or unless seismic criteria require different clearance]..
280544-4
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
280544
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY
AND SECURITY PATHWAYS AND CABLING
4.
5.
D.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings
are used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for
mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting.
Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors [2 inches
(50 mm)] <Insert dimension> above finished floor level. Install sleeves during
erection of floors.
Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:
1.
2.
Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular
sleeved opening.
Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board
assemblies.
E.
Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual pathways and cables with
flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.
F.
Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel cast-iron pipe
sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm)
annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
G.
Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves.
Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pathway or
cable and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.
3.2
SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A.
Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at
pathway entries into building.
B.
Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for
pathway or cable material and size. Position pathway or cable in center of sleeve.
Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pathway or
cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements
to expand and make watertight seal.
3.3
SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION
A.
Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.
B.
Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs
and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.
C.
Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.
D.
Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
280544-5
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
280544
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY
AND SECURITY PATHWAYS AND CABLING
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
DIA STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 2014
CONTRACT NO.201524852
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT
4.1
A.
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
No separate measurement shall be made for work under this Section.
PART 5 - PAYMENT
5.1
A.
PAYMENT
No separate payment will be made for work under this Section. The cost of the work
described in this Section shall be included in the Lump Sum Contract price.
END OF SECTION 280544
ISSUED FOR:
March 1, 2016
280544-6
REVISION NO 00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A. This section covers the fire detection and alarm system, and associated equipment for use in the
DEN Fire Alarm Replacement Project. The Contractor shall provide all skilled labor, material,
and equipment for the complete installation of the fire detection and alarm system additions
and modifications as shown on the drawings and specified herein. The fire alarm system on
this project is an extension of the existing fire alarm system. The Contractor shall acquire
from the manufacturer SimplexGrinnell the installation practices as published by the
manufacturer. Installation shall be in compliance with manufacturer published installation
guidelines except as noted in these specifications.
B. The specification is provided in support of the DEN Concourse B Fire Alarm Replacement
project as defined herein. The general scope of the project is to provide a replacement fire
alarm system that is compliant with the Contract Documents and all applicable codes,
standards, and project requirements. Upon project completion a complete and fully functional
system shall be provided to Denver International Airport (Owner).
C. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a complete installation and conduct testing in
compliance with DEN requirements, Denver Building Codes, and Denver Fire Prevention
Division requirements. If conflicts occur in this specification or between this specification and
the Contract Documents, the most stringent requirement shall apply.
D. Tenant Finish and other airport construction projects will be in progress during the course of
this installation. The requirements as set forth in separate tenant improvement documentation
packages shall be integrated into, and coordinated with the installation of the new fire alarm
system. Coordination and integration will be handled contractually by the Tenant Finish
project.
E.
The drawings referenced by this specification are for system installation, but may not represent
all applicable installation practices, methods, or means. The Engineer of Record has
developed shop drawings for permitting that reflect details of field installation. The
Contractor is not responsible for the creation of shop drawings, but is responsible for daily and
final accuracy of as-built documentation through an approved red line process.
F.
The Contractor for this scope of work shall be responsible for the installation of a complete fire
alarm replacement project as specified in the Contract Documents. All Fire Alarm Control
Panels (Nodes) and Workstations are currently installed and operational. All other fire alarm
equipment (i.e. parts), programming of Simplex panels, vendor testing, and deprogramming of
EST panels shall be by SimplexGrinnell under separate contract direct to DEN. Installation of
conduit, wire, fire alarm equipment, testing, and decommissioning/removal of existing
equipment shall be the responsibility of Contractor as required by this specification and
Contract drawings.
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 1
08 JAN 2016
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
G. The Engineer responsible for the design of the fire alarm and emergency communications
system for this project shall be known as the Engineer of Record, and shall be responsible for
the complete design of the fire alarm and emergency communications system.
H. The Engineer shall be responsible for ensuring that all documentation submitted will result in
the issuance of the permit to proceed by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). See Article
1.3, Paragraph B for Contractor’s permit submittal responsibilities.
I.
Owner’s Designated Representative shall be responsible for obtaining concurrence between the
appropriate DEN organizations, including Planning, Development, and Maintenance, in order
to formalize Owner approvals.
J.
The Contractor shall create and submit a detailed Migration Plan in accordance with Article
1.12 of this Section and Project Administrative Modification #17. The requirements of
Project Administrative Modification #17 are included in Article 1.12 of this Section.
K. The Contractor shall provide qualified fire alarm installers licensed as Fire Alarm System
Installer/Journeyman in accordance with the Denver Fire Department, Fire Prevention and
Investigation Division – Licensing Program. In addition, a NICET Level 2 certified
technician/installer shall be provided to supervise the work of each crew of up to four
installers. The NICET Level 2 technician is not required to be the crew foreman. Contractor
shall submit NICET Level 2 certification for a minimum of two technicians for the project
with the bid documentation. It is anticipated that at least four NICET Level 2 technicians may
be required due to the construction schedule of this project. Failure to include NICET Level 2
certification documents with the bid will disqualify the bidder for this project.
1.2
DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
A. AHJ – Authority Having Jurisdiction
B. ASD – Aspirating Smoke Detection
C. Contractor – The term Contractor in this Section shall apply to the organization directly
responsible for the complete installation of the fire detection and alarm system or contracted
portion thereof.
D. DEN – Denver International Airport
E.
DIA – Denver International Airport
F.
ECS – Emergency Communication System. At DEN, the ECS includes non-fire alarm system
components including the IED Paging System and video capture of MUFIDS and advertising
displays through the Com-Net System. For this scope of work, the Contractor will be
responsible only for ECS components that are connected, controlled, or powered by the fire
alarm system, such as “ALERT” strobes, LED textual signage, and interface control modules.
G. Engineer – The Engineer is responsible for the design of the fire alarm and emergency
communications system for this project and fulfills the design responsibility of the Engineer
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 2
08 JAN 2016
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
of Record. This may also be referred to as the Designer or Designer of Record elsewhere in
these specifications.
H. FACP – Fire Alarm Control Panel or Fire Alarm Control Unit
I.
FCC – Fire Command Center as defined by Denver Amendments to the International Fire Code
J.
FSCS – Firefighter Smoke Control Station [referred to as a Firefighter Smoke Control Panel
(FSCP) in the Denver Amendments]
K. IDNac – Simplex (proprietary) addressable notification signaling line circuit
L.
IDNet – Simplex (proprietary) signaling line circuit
M. Manufacturer – The term manufacturer in this Section shall apply to the organization
responsible for providing fire alarm equipment, equipment design and operation, and system
programming as defined herein. The manufacturer of the majority of the fire alarm equipment
shall be SimplexGrinnell.
N. NAC – Notification Appliance Circuit
O. Owner – Denver International Airport (DEN)
P.
RUI – Remote Unit Interface
Q. SLC – Signaling Line Circuit
R. TSW – Simplex TrueSite Workstation
1.3
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General and Special Conditions, Division 01 – General Requirements and other
applicable technical specifications apply to work of this Section.
B. The requirements of construction permits and authorization to proceed shall become part of this
specification. The construction permits shall be coordinated and obtained by the Contractor as
necessary, but permit costs will be paid directly by DEN. Prior to commencement and after
completion of work, the Contractor shall be responsible for securing all permits and
scheduling all inspections with the appropriate Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
Overtime/night inspection fees shall be paid directly by DEN.
1.4
RELATED SECTIONS
A. Technical Specification Division 01 - General Requirements.
B. Section 017330 – Cutting and Patching
C. Section 260400 – Basic Electrical Requirements
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 3
08 JAN 2016
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
D. Section 260519 – Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.
E.
Section 260526 – Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
F.
Section 260529 – Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems
G. Section 260533 – Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems
H. Section 260544 – Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling
I.
Section 260553 – Identification for Electrical Systems
J.
Section 262726 – Wiring Devices
K. Section 275123 – Emergency Communications System
1.5
REFERENCED STANDARDS
A. Comply with the requirements of the reference standards noted herein, except where more
stringent requirements are listed herein or otherwise required by the Contract Documents. A
listing of applicable reference standards is contained in Division 01. Adherence to these
standards will be strictly enforced.
B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1.
NFPA 13, Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems (2010 Edition)
2.
NFPA 20, Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection (2010 Edition)
3.
NFPA 70, National Electrical Code® (2011 Edition)
4.
NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code® (2010 Edition)
5.
NFPA 92A, Standard for Smoke-Control Systems Utilizing Barriers and Pressure
Differentials (2009 Edition)
6.
NFPA 92B, Standard for Smoke Management Systems in Malls, Atria, and Large Spaces
(2009 Edition)
7.
NFPA 101, Life Safety Code® (2009 Edition)
8.
NFPA 130, Standard on Fixed Guideway Transit and Passenger Rail Systems (2007
Edition)
9.
NFPA 415, Standard on Airport Terminal Buildings, Fueling Ramp Drainage, and
Loading Walkways (2008 Edition)
C. 2009 International Building Code (IBC) with the Denver Amendments
D. 2009 International Fire Code (IFC) with the Denver Amendments
E.
2009 International Mechanical Code (IMC) with the Denver Amendments
F.
City and County of Denver Building and Fire Code Amendments.
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 4
08 JAN 2016
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
G. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):
1.
UL 6, Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit – Steel
2.
UL 38, Standard for Manual Signaling Boxes for Fire Alarm Systems
3.
UL 228, Standard for Door Closers-Holders, With or Without Integral Smoke Detectors
4.
UL 268, Smoke Detectors for Fire Alarm Systems
5.
UL 268A, Standard for Smoke Detectors for Duct Application
6.
UL 464, Standard for Audible Signal Appliances
7.
UL 521, Standard for Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
8.
UL 797, Electrical Metallic Tubing – Steel
9.
UL 864, Standard for Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems
10.
UL 1242, Standard for Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit – Steel
11.
UL 1480, Standard for Speakers for Fire Alarm, Emergency, and Commercial and
Professional Use
12.
UL 1971, Standard for Signaling Devices for the Hearing Impaired
13.
Other UL Standards shall be applied to ensure that all materials are listed for their
intended purpose.
H. UNITED STATES ACCESS BOARD (USAB) – American with Disabilities Act (ADA) and
the 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design
I.
1.6
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS (ASME)
1.
ASME A17.1, Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators (2004 Edition; 2005
Supplement)
2.
ASME A17.3, Safety Code for Existing Elevators and Escalators (2005 Edition)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide a complete, addressable, networked microprocessor-based fire alarm system with
initiating devices, notification appliances, and monitoring and control devices, and other
equipment as specified herein. The system shall include, where necessary, fire alarm control
panels (units), workstations, fire alarm transponder panels (units), power expansion panels,
and all other required components as necessary to ensure compliant operation and
interoperability of this system.
B. Systems, equipment, and services to be provided and installed shall include all programming,
equipment, devices, and wiring required to allow the system to operate as a low voltage, fully
addressable Fire Management System and shall include, but not be limited to, the following in
order to provide a complete operating system:
1.
Fire alarm equipment and devices
2.
Fire alarm system software updates and modifications
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 5
08 JAN 2016
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
3.
Network software modifications to all workstations
4.
Raceways, boxes, fittings and accessories
5.
Connection to and interface with equipment and devices monitored or controlled by the
fire alarm system
6.
Record documents to include plan drawings to reflect as-built conditions, panel
schedules, and hard copy of system programming
7.
System acceptance testing
C. UL listing: All provided equipment shall be listed under the appropriate category by
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) for its intended purpose and shall bear the appropriate
UL label. UL shall be the primary listing agency. However, listing from other agencies shall
be acceptable when approved by the Engineer and DEN.
D. The system shall be designed with the following spare capacity.
1.7
1.
Signaling Line Circuits shall have 10% spare capacity except areas with tenants shall
have 20% spare capacity.
2.
Notification Appliance Circuits shall have 10% spare capacity except areas with tenants
shall have 20% spare capacity.
3.
Batteries provided for the new fire alarm system shall be sized for 120% of required
capacity. Except that NAC power extender panel batteries shall not be required to
exceed the charging capacity of the panel.
4.
The Engineer of Record will be responsible for providing spare capacity in the permitted
design documents. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring compliance with
spare capacity during any field modification of the design.
SYSTEM OPERATING FEATURES
A. Software:
1.
The fire alarm system shall allow for loading and editing instructions and operating
sequences as necessary. The system shall be capable of on-site programming to
accommodate system expansion and facilitate changes in operation. All software
operations shall be stored in a non-volatile programmable memory within the fire alarm
control unit. Loss of primary and secondary power shall not erase the instructions stored
in memory. The system shall be capable of storing dual configuration programs with one
active and one in reserve. The FACPs shall be capable of full system operation during a
new configuration download.
B. History Logs:
1.
The system shall provide a means to recall alarms and trouble conditions in chronological
order for the purpose of recreating an event history. A separate alarm and trouble log
shall be provided.
C. Recording of Events:
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 6
08 JAN 2016
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
1.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
Provide means to record all alarm, supervisory, and trouble events in system workstations
including the type of signal (alarm, supervisory, or trouble) with the device
identification, date and time of the occurrence.
D. Maximo Interface
1.
E.
F.
The system shall include an SQL interface at one or more of the fire alarm control panels
configured to send text messages of alarm, trouble and supervisory events to DEN’s
Maximo system. The Fire Alarm system shall have the capability to accept a .csv file
from Maximo and manually download this data into the Simplex Programming File by a
Factory Authorized Technician.
Network communication:
1.
Network node communication shall be via token ring technology. The TrueSite
Workstations (TSW) shall reside as a node on the token ring network unless otherwise
noted herein.
2.
A single open on the network communication loop shall not compromise network
communications. The token shall be passed in the opposite direction to maintain
communications throughout all network nodes. At the same time the status of the
communication link shall be reported.
3.
If a group of nodes becomes isolated from the rest of the network due to multiple fault
conditions, that group shall automatically form a sub-network with all common
interaction of monitoring and control remaining intact. The network shall be notified
with the exact details of the lost communications.
4.
Fiber optics communication shall be provided via a fiber optics modem. The modem shall
multiplex audio signals and digital communication via full duplex transmission over a
single fiber optic cable.
5.
Where requested, workstations located outside the Terminal, AOB, Concourses, Central
Plant, and AGTS Maintenance shall be Client workstations connected via Ethernet
utilizing IP communication to an appropriate server workstation in the Complex.
6.
If adding an FACP (network node) or TSW, the Contractor shall be responsible for fiber
connection at the DEN provided fiber optic patch panel at each location. The contractor
shall be responsible for fiber connection at the fire alarm control panel or the fire alarm
system workstation.
The following are basic required system functions and operating features:
1.
Priority of Signals: Fire alarm events have highest priority. Subsequent alarm events are
queued in the order received and do not affect existing alarm conditions. Priority Two,
Supervisory and Trouble events have second-, third-, and fourth-level priority,
respectively. Signals of a higher-level priority take precedence over signals of lower
priority even though the lower-priority condition occurred first. Annunciate all events
regardless of priority or order received.
2.
Non-interfering: An event on one zone does not prevent the receipt of signals from any
other zone. All zones are manually resettable from the FACP after the initiating device or
devices are restored to normal. The activation of an addressable device does not prevent
the receipt of signals from subsequent addressable device activations.
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 7
08 JAN 2016
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
G. Transmission to an approved Supervising Station: Automatically route alarm, supervisory, and
trouble signals to the Denver Fire Department via an AES subscriber model 7788F on DFD
frequency 460.325 MHZ (options: color is RED with 8 E.O.L. inputs). Existing locations are
indicated on the drawings. Contractor is responsible for ensuring that all inputs added to the
fire alarm system properly report to the Denver Fire Department through the AES
transceivers.
H. Annunciation: Operation of alarm and supervisory initiating devices shall be annunciated at the
FACP, the Network Display Units, each TrueSite Workstation, and the Airport Fire
Department (via True Site Client workstations), indicating the type of device, the operational
state of the device (i.e., alarm, trouble or supervisory), and the custom label associated with
the device.
I.
J.
System Reset:
1.
The "System Reset" button shall be used to return the system to its normal state. This
function shall be available from the TrueSite Workstations.
2.
Display messages shall provide operator assurance of the sequential steps ("IN
PROGRESS", "RESET COMPLETED") as they occur.
3.
The system shall verify all circuits or devices are restored prior to resetting the system to
avoid the potential for re-alarming the system. The display message shall indicate
"ALARM PRESENT, SYSTEM RESET ABORTED."
4.
If the alarm condition remains, the system shall remain in an alarmed condition.
5.
The system shall be configured such that either individual or global resets can be
accomplished from any TrueSite Workstation.
6.
Reset on a fire alarm control panel shall only affect the associated building (i.e., panel
reset shall not be Complex wide).
Evacuation Drill: A manual evacuation (drill) switch shall be provided to operate the
notification appliances at each FACP without causing other control circuits to be activated.
The manual evacuation switch shall initiate audible evacuation messages through the
associated building ECS system and initiate appropriate visual notification appliances
throughout the building.
K. Walk test: The system shall have the capacity of 8 programmable pass code-protected one
person testing groups, such that only a portion of the system need be disabled during testing
(i.e., no more than one Building). The actuation of the "enable one person test" program at
the control unit shall activate the "One Person Testing" mode of the system as follows:
1.
The city circuit connection and any suppression release circuits shall be bypassed for the
testing group.
2.
Control relay functions associated with one of the 8 testing groups shall be bypassed.
3.
The control unit shall indicate a trouble condition.
4.
The alarm activation of any initiating device in the testing group shall be able to initiate
the audible notification appliances assigned only to that group to sound a code to identify
the device or zone.
5.
The unit shall automatically reset after signaling is complete.
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 8
08 JAN 2016
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
6.
L.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
Any opening of an initiating device or notification appliance circuit wiring shall cause the
audible signals to sound for 4 seconds indicating the trouble condition.
Bypass Switches: The workstations and FACPs shall be provided with bypass functions to
allow individual deactivation of fire safety functions. Bypass switches/controls shall be
provided for all appropriate functions including the following:
1.
City circuit disconnect
2.
Smoke control activation
3.
Fan shutdown function
4.
Elevator recall and shunt trip
5.
Fire suppression release (where appropriate)
6.
Audible and visual notification
M. Audible Alarm Notification:
1.
The existing FACP in each Building’s FCC provides an interface with the existing IED
Public Address/Paging System to allow Emergency Communication System operation.
ECS system operation shall not be interrupted during construction. Refer to the
Sequence of Operation matrix on the drawings.
2.
Notification from the fire alarm system shall be provided directly through visual
signaling devices (strobes) connected directly to the fire alarm system, and via audio
announcements and textual messaging activated by the fire alarm system and delivered
through the IED Emergency Communication System.
N. Tenant Sound Systems: If indicated on the drawings, provide control modules in each tenant
space to disable audible and visual non-emergency systems. Audible and visual systems are
to be disabled prior to any ECS announcement in tenant spaces where this functionality has
been designed into the system.
O. Fire Suppression Systems Monitoring and Control:
1.
Sprinkler Water Flow: Activation of a water flow switch shall initiate alarm operations.
The area of sprinkler coverage shall be provided on the TrueSite Workstation graphic
screens via hatching.
2.
Sprinkler Valve Tamper Switch: The activation of any valve tamper switch shall activate
system supervisory operations.
3.
Dry Pipe/Pre-action Sprinkler Low Air Signal: The receipt of a low air signal on a
sprinkler system shall activate system supervisory operations and clearly indicate the
location of the mechanical equipment at the annunciation locations defined above.
4.
Pre-Action Fire Suppression Systems: Upon activation of alarm initiation devices within
an area protected by a pre-action fire suppression system, the suppression releasing
sequence shall be initiated unless an abort station has been activated and held. The
emergency response station TrueSite Workstations shall have the ability to manually
release the system. Programming of system release from the TrueSite Workstations shall
be on a case by case basis at the direction of DEN personnel.
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 9
08 JAN 2016
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
5.
P.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
Special Suppression Systems: Non-water based suppression and deluge systems are
provided with separate Suppression Releasing Panels that monitor initiating devices and
initiate suppression system release. The main fire alarm system shall monitor these
Releasing Panels for alarm, trouble and, where possible, supervisory conditions.
Elevator Detection, Controls and Interfaces
1.
Elevator life safety functions shall be provided in accordance with City and County of
Denver. Contractor’s scope of work shall be limited to fire alarm interface devices and
coordinated testing in accordance with Article 3.2.A.3.
2.
Elevator recall functions: Where elevator recall is required, the following sequences shall
be followed. Primary and alternate floors for each elevator or elevator bank shall be as
determined for each lobby by the Engineer, Owner and Denver Fire Department.
a.
Primary Floor Recall: Activation of initiating devices, as identified in subsequent
paragraphs, cause the elevator to travel to the primary floor, open the elevator
doors and remain at that location.
1)
For the Airport Office Building, the elevator doors shall close 60 seconds
after arrival at the primary floor.
b.
Alternate Floor Recall: Activation of elevator lobby smoke detector(s) on the
primary floor shall cause the elevator to travel to the alternate floor, open the
elevator doors and remain at that location.
1)
For the Airport Office Building, the elevator doors shall close 60 seconds
after arrival at the alternate floor.
3.
Elevator power shunt functions: Where shunting of elevator power is required, provide
necessary equipment to cause power shunt functions and to monitor power to the shunt
trip circuit. Control and monitor modules necessary to achieve these shunt functions
shall be located within 3 feet of the circuit.
4.
Smoke Detectors in Elevator Lobbies: Smoke detectors shall be provided in all elevator
lobbies within 21 feet of the centerline of each elevator door. Elevator lobbies with
ceiling heights greater than 15 feet shall be provided with a sidewall-type smoke detector
mounted within 5 feet of the top of the elevator door or as recognized by applicable
codes.
5.
a.
Floors Other Than Primary Floor: Activation of elevator lobby smoke detectors on
floors other than the primary floor shall cause recall to the Primary Floor.
b.
Primary Floor: Activation of elevator lobby smoke detector(s) on the primary floor
shall cause recall to the Alternate Floor.
c.
Elevator Lobby Doors: If elevator lobby doors with electronic hold-open devices
(e.g., magnetic door holders) are provided, activation of lobby smoke detector(s)
shall cause release of the doors.
Smoke Detectors in Elevator Equipment/Control Rooms: Smoke detector(s) shall be
provided in elevator equipment/control rooms.
a.
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
Elevator Equipment/Control Rooms on Floors Other Than Primary Floor:
Activation of smoke detector(s) shall cause recall to the Primary Floor. Activation
of smoke detectors shall also cause activation of the visual alarm (i.e., “flashing
hat”) inside the elevator car.
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 10
08 JAN 2016
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
6.
b.
Elevator Equipment/Control Rooms on Primary Floor: Activation of smoke
detector(s) shall cause recall to the Alternate Floor. Activation of smoke detectors
shall also cause activation of the visual alarm (i.e., “flashing hat”) inside the
elevator car.
c.
Where an elevator equipment/control room serves multiple hoistways, sufficient
control and monitor equipment shall be provided to complete the identified
functions in the effected hoistway only.
Heat Detectors in Elevator Equipment/Control Rooms: Heat detectors shall be provided
in elevator equipment/control rooms that are provided with automatic sprinklers. Heat
detector(s) shall be spaced such that a detector is within 2 feet of all automatic sprinklers.
a.
b.
7.
Top of Hoistway:
1)
Primary Floor is the same as Highest Level of Elevator Access: Activation
of smoke detector(s) shall cause recall to a floor other than the highest level,
as defined by the Engineer, Owner and Denver Fire Department. Elevator
operation shall be to the Alternate Floor. Activation of smoke detectors shall
also cause activation of the visual alarm (i.e., “flashing hat”) inside the
elevator car.
2)
Primary Floor is Other than Highest Level of Elevator Access: Activation of
smoke detector(s) shall cause recall to the Primary Floor. Activation of
smoke detectors shall also cause activation of the visual alarm (i.e.,
“flashing hat”) inside the elevator car.
Heat Detectors in Elevator Hoistways: Heat detectors shall be provided at the top of
elevator hoistways that are provided with automatic sprinklers. Heat detector(s) shall be
of the fixed temperature type, with an operating temperature lower than that of the
sprinklers (e.g., 190°F heat detector with 286°F sprinklers). Heat detector(s) shall be
spaced such that a detector is within 2 feet of all automatic sprinklers.
a.
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
Elevator Equipment/Control Rooms on Floors Other Than Primary Floor: Activation of heat detector(s) shall cause recall to the Primary Floor followed by shunting
of power to the elevator. Sufficient time delay prior to shunt trip to allow for recall
from the most remote floor to occur. Activation of heat detectors shall also cause
activation of the visual alarm (i.e., “flashing hat”) inside the elevator car.
Elevator Equipment/Control Rooms on Primary Floor: Activation of heat detector(s) shall cause recall to the Alternate Floor followed by shunting of power to the
elevator. Sufficient time delay prior to shunt trip to allow for recall from the most
remote floor to occur. Activation of heat detectors shall also cause activation of the
visual alarm (i.e., “flashing hat”) inside the elevator car.
Smoke Detectors in Elevator Hoistways: Smoke detector(s) shall be provided in elevator
hoistways where automatic sprinklers are provided.
a.
8.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
Top of Hoistway:
1)
Primary Floor is the same as Highest Level of Elevator Access: Activation
of heat detector(s) shall cause recall to a floor other than the highest level, as
defined by the Engineer, Owner and Denver Fire Department, followed by
shunting of power to the elevator. Elevator operation shall be to the
alternate floor. Sufficient time delay prior to shunt trip to allow for recall
from the most remote floor to occur. Activation of heat detectors shall also
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 11
08 JAN 2016
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
2)
b.
9.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
cause activation of the visual alarm (i.e., “flashing hat”) inside the elevator
car.
Primary Floor is Other than Highest Level of Elevator Access: Activation of
heat detector(s) shall cause recall to the Primary Floor, followed by shunting
of power to the elevator. Sufficient time delay prior to shunt trip to allow
for recall from the most remote floor to occur. Activation of heat detectors
shall also cause activation of the visual alarm (i.e., “flashing hat”) inside the
elevator car.
Bottom of Hoistway: Activation of heat detector(s) shall cause recall to a floor
other than the lowest level, as defined by the Engineer, Owner and Denver Fire
Department, followed by shunting of power to the elevator. Elevator operation
shall be to the Alternate Floor. Sufficient time delay prior to shunt trip to allow for
recall from the most remote floor to occur. Activation of heat detectors shall also
cause activation of the visual alarm (i.e., “flashing hat”) inside the elevator car.
Elevator Hoistway Vents: Smoke detector(s) shall be provided in elevator hoistways
where fire alarm controlled relief vents are provided. Activation of the shaft smoke
detector shall cause opening of the vent. Control modules necessary to cause opening of
the vent shall be located within 3 feet of the point of connection to the vent controller.
Q. Power Requirements
1.
The control units shall receive AC power via a dedicated, secured circuit breaker. Where
a circuit breaker is the disconnecting means, a red breaker locking device shall be
installed. Circuit disconnecting means shall be permanently identified with a red label as
to its purpose (i.e., “FIRE ALARM” for fire alarm systems, “EMERGENCY
COMMUNICATIONS” for emergency communications systems and “FIRE
ALARM/ECS” for combination fire alarm and emergency communications systems).
2.
All circuits requiring system-operating power shall be 24 VDC and shall be individually
fused at the control unit.
3.
The incoming power to the system shall be supervised so that any power failure shall be
indicated at the control unit. A green "power on" LED shall be displayed continuously at
the user interface while incoming power is present.
4.
The system batteries shall be supervised so that a low battery or a depleted battery
condition, or disconnection of the battery shall be indicated at the control unit and
displayed for the specific fault type.
5.
The system shall support a NAC Lockout feature to prevent subsequent activation of
Notification Appliance Circuits after a Depleted Battery condition occurs in order to
make use of battery reserve for front panel annunciation and control.
6.
The system shall support 100% of addressable devices in alarm or operated at the same
time, under both primary (AC) and secondary (battery) power conditions.
7.
Loss of primary power shall sound a trouble signal at the FACP and TSW. The FACP
shall indicate when the system is operating on an alternate power supply.
R. Smoke Control System:
1.
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
The system shall provide automatic operation of smoke exhaust fans, makeup air fans, air
handling units, and dampers in accordance with the smoke control sequence provided
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 12
08 JAN 2016
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
with the drawings. Manual control of the smoke control system shall be provided at each
of the TrueSite Workstations.
1.8
2.
At no time shall automatic and manual smoke control functions be disabled without
receiving written approval from the Owner and the Fire Department, at which time a
backup plan shall be agreed upon for the duration of the conversion process within a
given smoke compartment.
3.
Provide addressable control point modules interfaced with the mechanical systems. This
includes individual motor starter control modules, “high level” interface points to the
building automation systems, damper position indicator monitor modules, and all other
system interfaces currently controlled by the existing fire alarm system.
SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
A. Sequence of operation for HVAC, suppression systems, and security are indicated on the
Contract Drawings.
B. Emergency Communication System: The fire alarm system shall interface with the ECS for
audible notification and for textual visual notification.
C. Presignal Function: Occupant notification shall be provided consistent with presignal function
from NFPA 72 in Airport Terminal Buildings as defined by NFPA 72-2013 section 23.8.1.2.
Specifics of system operations shall be identified in the design drawings and in project shop
drawings.
D. Alarm Conditions: Upon activation of an alarm device, the system shall operate in Presignal
mode as follows:
E.
1.
Indication of alarm condition at the FACP annunciation locations as defined above.
2.
Identification of the device that is the source of the alarm at the FACP annunciation
locations as defined above.
3.
Record the event in the FACP historical log.
4.
Close doors normally held open by magnetic door holders within the affected and
adjacent smoke compartments.
5.
Initiation of elevator Phase I functions (recall, shunt trip, illumination of indicator in cab,
etc.) in accordance with ASME/ANSI A17.1, when specified detectors or sensors are
activated, as required by the Denver Fire Department.
6.
Initiation of Fire Suppression Sequence in areas protected with special Fire Suppression
Systems.
7.
Alarm Silencing: If the "Alarm Silence" button is pressed, all audible and visual alarm
signals shall cease operation. This function shall be available from the TrueSite
Workstations.
Supervisory Conditions: Upon activation of a supervisory device, the system shall operate as
follows:
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 13
08 JAN 2016
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
F.
1.9
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
1.
Activate the system supervisory service audible signal and illuminate the LED at the
control unit.
2.
Pressing the Supervisory Acknowledge Key shall silence the supervisory audible signal
while maintaining the Supervisory LED "on" indicating an off-normal condition.
3.
Record the event in the FACP historical log.
4.
Transmission of a supervisory signal to the Denver Fire Department.
5.
Restoring the condition shall cause the Supervisory LED to clear and restore the system
to normal.
Trouble Conditions: Upon activation of a trouble condition, the system shall operate as follows:
1.
Activate the system trouble service audible signal and illuminate the LED at the control
unit.
2.
Pressing the Trouble Acknowledge Key shall silence the supervisory audible signal while
maintaining the Trouble LED "on" indicating an off-normal condition.
3.
Record the event in the FACP historical log.
4.
Transmission of a trouble signal to the Denver Fire Department.
5.
Restoring the condition shall cause the Trouble LED to clear and restore the system to
normal.
INTERFACE WITH OTHER SYSTEMS
A. Security: Contractor shall coordinate, provide, and assure complete connection and interface
with security systems modified and installed as part of this Contract. Security interface details
shall be addressed and provided in separate documents in a Security Sensitive Information
(SSI) format acceptable to the DEN Project Manager.
B. HVAC: Contractor shall coordinate, provide, and assure complete connection and interface
with HVAC systems modified and installed as part of this Contract.
C. Fire Protection: Contractor shall coordinate, provide, and assure complete connection and
interface with Fire Protection system devices installed as part of this Contract.
1.10
QUALITY CONTROL
A. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for daily quality control of all system installation,
coordination with trades, and coordination with DEN Maintenance (Life Safety) and
Engineering. Observation by DEN of work identified in Paragraph 3.6 does not take the place
of the Contractor’s Quality Control Program.
B. An up-to-date electronic data file of system programming software in two separate media
formats (i.e., backup drives) shall be maintained in the construction office to clearly indicate
how system functions are accomplished. This programming shall include the software
installed in the workstations. The electronic data file shall be updated daily during
construction/migration. The system vendor shall be responsible for this item.
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 14
08 JAN 2016
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
C. Services of a factory-authorized service representative/technician shall be on site, as required by
the Owner, during the entire installation and reconnection of the new equipment to supervise
the field assembly and connection of components and the pretesting, testing, and adjustment
of the system. The technical representative shall monitor all wiring changes and assist the
Contractor installation team members to ensure a smooth transition to the newly installed
equipment. A programming technician shall be on site during all pretesting and testing to
verify correct operation and programmed sequence of operations. Contractor shall coordinate
same.
D. Service personnel shall be qualified and experienced in the inspection, testing, and maintenance
of fire alarm systems. Service personnel shall have the same certifications as required for
system installers.
E.
The Contractor shall provide qualified fire alarm installers licensed as Fire Alarm System
Installer/Journeyman in accordance with the Denver Fire Department, Fire Prevention and
Investigation Division – Licensing Program. In addition, a NICET Level 2 certified
technician/installer shall be provided to supervise the work of each crew of up to four
installers. The NICET Level 2 technician is not required to be the crew foreman. Contractor
shall submit NICET Level 2 certification for a minimum of two technicians for the project
with the bid documentation. It is anticipated that at least four NICET Level 2 technicians may
be required due to the construction schedule of this project. Failure to include NICET Level 2
certification documents with the bid will disqualify the bidder for this project.
F.
The installation of this system is to be performed under the direct supervision of the
manufacturer. The certification and record of completion of each component will be prepared
by the manufacturer after performing all pertinent tests. Contractor shall coordinate same.
G. The system shall be installed under the supervision of a qualified, trained NICET (minimum
Level 3) Certified SimplexGrinnell representative/technician provided by others. The system
shall be demonstrated to perform all of the functions as specified. A single NICET (minimum
Level 3) Certified SimplexGrinnell representative may supervise the entire project.
Programming and project oversight may be provided by other Simplex Grinnell
representatives under the supervision of the NICET Level 3 Certified individual. Contractor
shall coordinate same.
H. The manufacturer shall provide a factory-trained NICET level 3 certified service technician at
the DEN facility, within 4 hours of a request for on-site service. Contractor shall coordinate
same as necessary.
I.
The manufacturer’s supervisory work shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, checking
all the system wiring connections; advising the Contractor installation team members
regarding technical details of the installation; and the adjustment and testing of all
components of the system in order to ensure a complete and fully operable system. Contractor
shall coordinate same.
J.
The manufacturer’s representative shall also be required to instruct designated maintenance and
management personnel (e.g., DEN Life Safety) in the general operation of the system and to
give the designated personnel an overview of the system functions when the system is in
normal, supervisory mode, alarm mode, and trouble mode. Contractor shall coordinate same.
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 15
08 JAN 2016
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
1.11
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
SUBMITTALS
A. Provide submittals in accordance with the provisions of Division 01, General Requirements of
the Technical Specifications and as required by this Section.
B. Provide the following submittal information.
1.
Manufacturer’s literature describing all products and materials that will be used in the
system.
a.
Product data sheets for system and installation components shall be highlighted to
indicate the specific installation products, features, or functions required to meet
this specification. These shall be electronically submitted in PDF format.
b.
Wiring diagrams and installation instructions for individual Fire Alarm Devices
prepared by SimplexGrinnell engineering.
C. Submit NICET certifications and Denver Fire Department Fire Alarm Licenses for all field
installers within 30 days of NTP. A valid and current copy of all certifications and licenses
shall be maintained on the project site. DFD Licenses shall be worn by all installers at all
times while on-site.
D. Record Drawings shall be provided per Article 1.17 of this Section.
E.
Contractor’s Migration Plan per Article 1.12 C of this Section.
F.
Contractor’s Quality Control Plan per Article 1.10 of this Section and Division 01.
G. Operation and Maintenance Data per Article 1.18 of this Section.
H. Warranty per Article 1.20 of this Section.
I.
1.12
Approved submittals shall remain on the site at all times.
MIGRATION SEQUENCE AND PLAN
A. Pre-Migration
1.
Since the DEN Complex must remain open to the public at all times (24/7/365), special
obligations are required of the installing contractor to keep a functional fire alarm system
operational throughout the migration process. Thus, it has been determined that a
priority of migration events are to be followed and certain migration elements shall be
done in very limited timeframes.
2.
Prior to migration of any devices, the following items shall have occurred:
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
a.
Simplex Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) nodes building-wide shall be installed,
operational, and connected/communicating with the Simplex Network.
b.
DFD alarm notification via the AES Transceiver connected to the Concourse B
Simplex node shall be operational at all times. Disabling of the transmission of
alarm signals shall occur during each work shift where the system is impaired.
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 16
08 JAN 2016
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
c.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
The primary means of emergency audible notification has been transferred to the
Emergency Communication System (ECS) via the Simplex System workstations
and the Simplex system is programmed with Pre-signal operation.
3.
As allowed by DBC Section 907.1.6 Exception 2, the existing and new fire alarm control
panels are co-located in the Fire Command Center of the Concourse B and will require
two points of reset during migration.
4.
As of Bid Date, all pre-migration steps have been completed.
B. Migration
1.
Phase
Phase 1
Phase
2A
Phase
2B
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
After the pre-migration items are operational, the following migration sequence shall be
followed:
Description
Requirements
Install all major fire alarm risers
Requires Contractor to install all new conduits for
(i.e. new conduit) as indicated on
vertical risers (including horizontal conduit
the drawings. Install Fire Alarm
required to reach vertical riser locations) on all
Terminal Cabinets and Fire Alarm
floors as well as conduit required to reach all Phase
Remote Transponder Panels where
2 device locations.
indicated on the drawings.
Requires Contractor to provide new conduit and
Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) wiring to all fire
sprinkler monitored devices first. Once SLC
wiring is located at each fire sprinkler device
Migration of all fire sprinkler
location, the required fire alarm devices can be
water flow and valve tamper
installed, programmed, and pre-tested for correct
switch monitoring building wide.
function. Then, all fire sprinkler monitored
devices can be migrated in a few work shifts
within a two week period for Concourse B.
Requires Contractor to provide new conduit and
Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) wiring to all major
smoke control devices (specifically smoke zones
Migration of all major smoke
WHR3, WSC2, WHR2, WSC1, WHR1, CC,
control fan control and monitor
EHR1, ESC1, EHR2, ESC2, EHR3, RJSB, RJSH).
points building wide for the large
Once SLC wiring is located at each smoke control
public smoke control zone fans.
device location, the required fire alarm devices can
These large public area smoke
be installed, programmed, and pre-tested for
control zone fans are normally
correct function. Then, all smoke control devices
roof mounted and are configured
can be migrated in a few work shifts within a two
to allow smoke control of the
week period for Concourse B. Please note that
primary public areas. Individual
while it is desirable to migrate both control and
tenant smoke control zone
monitor points simultaneously, existing wiring and
equipment and basement zones
conduit configurations may prevent the migration
will be migrated as a part of the
of status monitoring points at the same time as
later phase.
control points are migrated. If status monitoring
points are not migrated during Phase 2B, such
points shall be prioritized for migration during
Phase 3.
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 17
08 JAN 2016
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Phase 3
Migrate by building
area/floor/node all fire alarm
initiating devices (manual pull
stations, smoke detectors, heat
detectors, etc.), control and
monitor devices, notification
appliances (strobes and horns),
and any third-party suppression
panels in the building. It is
suggested that the general
migration order proceed from
West to East and work be
completed within a Node prior to
moving on to the next Node,
unless Nodes can be completed
simultaneously.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
Requires Contractor to proceed with a timely
migration of all initiating devices and notification
appliances by building floor/area. In general
compliance with DBC Section 907.1.6 Exception
3, migration within each building floor/area shall
be completed prior to commencement of work on
any other floor/area unless the contractor can
complete multiple floors/areas simultaneously.
Given the size of the floors in Concourse B, logical
sub-division of floors for migration purposes shall
be allowed; for example “Far West Hold Room”,
“West In-Board Sub-Core”, etc. To provide clear
limitations on migrated area, work areas at any
given time shall not exceed 52,000 square feet in
size in a given panel zone. Note that as multiple
crews may be working on multiple panels, more
than one area of Concourse B may be migrated at
the same time with proper coordination of events
with the system vendor and approved DEN shutdown authorization.
2.
In compliance with DBC Section 907.1.6 (Systems out of service) and Exception 6, no
fire sprinkler or smoke control device shall be unconnected to either the existing EST fire
alarm system or the new Simplex fire alarm system except for the actual time it takes to
migrate that device from one system to the other system. This rule prohibits a device
from being left unconnected/unmonitored at the end of a work shift. Exceptions to this
rule require special notification to DEN/DFD personnel and may require fire watch
procedures by the Contractor. See also Article 3.6.C.2.
3.
Per DFD requirements, device migration is limited to a 10-hour shut-down period within
each 24-hour calendar day.
C. Contractor Migration Plan
1.
2.
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
The installing contractor shall be responsible for the creation of and submission the
Owner (DEN) of a detailed Migration Plan within 30 days of NTP. It shall capture the
intent of any applicable Administrative Modifications, DBC Section 907.1.6, the project
specifications, and the design drawings by showing the detailed milestones required by
the project including, but not limited to, the following:
a.
Phase 1: Installation of vertical risers, remote transponder panels, and major new
conduit and wiring installation to be run prior to any device migration.
b.
Phase 2A & 2B: Fire sprinkler device and major smoke control device migration.
c.
Phase 3: Building area/zone/floor conduit, wire, and device installation/migration
by logical group.
The Migration Plan shall include a detailed construction schedule with all significant
milestones identified. The construction schedule shall detail the use of alternate shifts in
spaces where day shift installation/migration is not possible or would be significantly
hindered, including baggage tunnel ramps, train platforms, tenant spaces, airline clubs,
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 18
08 JAN 2016
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
public elevators, and similar spaces. The installing Contractor in coordination with DEN
shall develop a detailed Migration Plan Checklist showing migration activity which will
occur during each 24 hour migration period. The Migration Plan Checklist shall be
submitted and reviewed in weekly construction meetings. All construction schedules
shall be in a format acceptable to DEN construction management.
3.
4.
1.13
The Migration Plan shall include testing milestones where appropriate. The following
testing milestones are to be provided at a minimum:
a.
Pre-Test (wire and device installation by installing Contractor)
b.
Migration Test (immediate post-migration device test by installing contractor and
vendor)
c.
Sequence Test (programmed sequence of operation test conducted by Contractor
and vendor)
d.
Demonstration Test (operation and sequence test conducted by Contractor and
vendor and witnessed by Engineer of Record)
e.
DFD Proof Test (operation and sequence test conducted by Contractor and vendor
and witnessed by Owner)
In many cases, the migration of a device to the Simplex system will mean the former EST
system device will be de-commissioned. The installing Contractor is responsible for
coordinating a daily (per-shift) list with DEN regarding the devices that are migrated
(on-line) and de-commissioned (removed from service).
ENGINEERED SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Shop Drawings
1.
Shop drawings will be provided by others.
a.
2.
Shop drawing format:
1)
All drawings shall be scalable at 1/8 inch per foot unless indicated otherwise
for full size drawings. Full size drawings shall be plotted on 34 x 44 inch
paper.
2)
Half-size drawings shall be scalable at 1/16 inch per foot and shall be
plotted on 17 x 22 inch paper. All drawing information shall be readable
when plotted to half-size.
Shop drawings will be provided to the Contractor in electronic format only. Contractor
shall be responsible for all costs for electronic field devices (e.g. tablets) and/or printing
costs as required. This includes the required printed as-built record drawing set per
Article 1.17.
B. Field Verification:
1.
Field Verification: The Contractor and SimplexGrinnell shall field investigate and assure
that system modifications or additions include any modifications required to system
capacity.
2.
Room Names and Numbers on the Permit Set shall be verified by the installing
Contractor. Official room names and numbers shall be obtained from the DEN BIM
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 19
08 JAN 2016
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
Department for inclusion on shop drawings and fire alarm computer graphic (TSW)
workstations. Room names and numbers shall conform to DEN standards through the
Autodesk Revit model as maintained by the DEN BIM Department.
1.14
ENGINEERED SYSTEM PROGRAM AND COMPUTER GRAPHICS MODIFICATIONS
A. System Programming and Graphics Modifications will be provided by SimplexGrinnell under
separate contract. The Contractor is required to coordinate with SimplexGrinnell to facilitate
the delivery of the following:
1.15
1.
Software Modifications: Provide software modification in compliance with NFPA 72
and consistent with Contract Documents. This includes but is not limited to
development, installation, and testing of customized programming software
modifications for complete system modifications, including but not limited to software
modifications for Fire Alarm Master Panel, Fire Alarm Remote Panel, and 4100ES/4120
installations. Provide update of Message and Zone files in hard copy form and install
hard copies in FCC hard copy records system.
2.
Graphics Modifications: The TSW updates shall be graphically noted to identify that the
added graphics is work “Under construction”. This annotation shall be removed at the
time of system acceptance by the Denver Fire Department.
3.
Operation of software during testing: Provide onsite presence of a programming
technician during all system testing as defined in Article 3.6 below.
PERMITS AND APPROVALS
A. Coordinate and obtain all necessary permits from the City and County of Denver. Permit fee
will be paid directly by the Owner.
1.16
TESTING, REPORTS, AND CERTIFICATIONS
A. Testing, Reports and Certifications per Part 3 of this Specification Section.
B. Testing: Submit testing procedure and recording forms for each component of the system to the
Engineer for review and approval. Upon approval and successful testing, these forms shall be
completed and saved for record purposes.
1.17
PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Submit record drawing documents in conformity with the provisions of Division 01.
B. Contractor shall maintain on site accurate record drawings indicating dimensioned locations of
constructed raceways, boxes and devices. Any modifications to work depicted on the
Engineered shop drawings shall be noted. Field modified documents shall be updated daily
and shall at all times be available for DEN review. The field modified drawings shall indicate
the following:
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 20
08 JAN 2016
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
1.
The exact locations and installation details of the installed equipment.
2.
The exact location of all existing initiating devices and notification appliances.
3.
The address of each addressable device.
4.
The installed wiring and color coding and wire tag notations for the exact locations of all
installed equipment.
5.
Locations of each End-of-Line Resistor, End-Of-Line Device and fault circuit isolator.
6.
Specific point-to-point interconnections and riser diagrams between all equipment and
internal wiring of the equipment. Typical point-to-point wiring diagrams are not
acceptable.
7.
The exact “x” and “y” locations of all raceways and junction boxes.
8.
Dated sequence of operations matrix and battery and voltage drop calculations.
9.
Notation of and changes required by all Owner approved RFIs and change directives.
C. Record Drawings per Division 01. “As Built” Plans shall be provided in the same format and
manner as described for Installation Drawings. Each set shall be equipped with a plan holder
equal to “Stacor Plan Clamps” for the appropriate size drawings. Record drawings will be
created by others from the Contractor’s field modified permit drawings (i.e., redlined field asbuilt drawings).
D. Contractor shall maintain two as-built record drawing sets kept in separate locations. One set
may be kept in electronic format.
1.18
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit operation and maintenance data per the provisions of Division 01.
1.19
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to the site per the provisions of Division 01.
B. Store and protect products per the provisions of Division 01.
1.20
WARRANTY
A. All components, parts and assemblies supplied by the manufacturer shall be guaranteed against
defects in materials and workmanship for a period of 36 months following Substantial
Completion. Submit warranty per Division 01 requirements.
B. Warranty service shall be provided by a trained specialist of the equipment manufacturer, who
shall be based in a fully staffed, fully stocked (replacement parts and test equipment) office,
located within 50 miles of the site.
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 21
08 JAN 2016
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
1.21
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
SPARE PARTS
A. Contractor shall at the time of system testing, maintain on site spare stock adequate to replace
any non-functional device.
B. Spare stock shall be obtained from the manufacturer by a separate contract at project
completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A. Fire alarm system equipment shall be new, standard components, regularly manufactured by
SimplexGrinnell. Products supplied by SimplexGrinnell will be provided by the manufacturer
and requirements referenced herein are for information only.
B. Contractor shall provide all other equipment including, but not limited to, conduit, wire,
supports, device mounts, fire stopping materials, paint, and access panels.
C. Equipment from a different manufacturer may only be used where identified in the Contract
Documents or accepted in writing by the Engineer and Owner.
D. Addressable visual notification and addressable audible notification appliances shall be
manufactured by SimplexGrinnell, unless indicated otherwise on the drawings.
E.
2.2
Where equipment of different manufacturers is used, such equipment shall be UL listed and
labeled as an integrated fire alarm system and certified as compatible with SimplexGrinnell
systems (i.e., pre action sprinkler systems).
FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANELS (FACP)
A. All fire alarm panels shall comply with UL 864, 9th edition "Standard for Control Units and
Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems".
B. FACP Hardware: Where required based on project scope, the following FACP and other
hardware shall be provided:
1.
Power Limited base panel with Platinum cabinet and door, 120 VAC input power.
2.
Simplex 4100ES Fire Alarm Control Panel shall be model 4100-9314 or as specified by
SimplexGrinnell.
3.
Simplex 4100ES Fire Alarm Transponder Panel shall be model 4100-9600 or as specified
by SimplexGrinnell.
4.
Addressable initiating device signaling line circuit (SLC) shall be provided by Quad
IDNet Isolator Module model 4100-3107 or IDNet 2+2 Module model 4100-3110,
unless otherwise approved in writing by DEN.
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 22
08 JAN 2016
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
5.
Addressable notification shall be provided by Enhanced Power Supply (EPS) model
4100-5325 or as specified by SimplexGrinnell.
6.
Addressable notification repeater panels shall be 4009 IDNac Repeaters model 40099601 or as specified by SimplexGrinnell.
7.
Standard notification power panels shall be 4009 IDNet NAC Extender Panel model
4009-9201 or as specified by SimplexGrinnell.
8.
Where required, provide Intelligent Remote Battery Charger for charging up to 110Ah
batteries.
C. Remote Unit Interface: supervised serial communication channel for control and monitoring of
remotely located annunciators and I/O panels.
D. Enclosure: Arrange unit so all operations required for testing or for normal care and
maintenance of the system are performed from the front of the enclosure. If more than a single
unit is required to form a complete control unit, provide exactly matching modular unit
enclosures. All cabinets shall be keyed alike and typical of manual pull stations.
E.
Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Each Fire Alarm Control Panel and Network
Display Unit shall include an 854 character InfoAlarm Display, expanded content multi-line
QVGA LCD display to indicate alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and shall
include a keypad for use in entering and executing control commands.
F.
Expandability: The system shall include the necessary hardware to provide expanded content,
multi-line, operator interface displays. The expanded content multi-line displays shall be
Quarter-VGA (QVGA) or larger and be capable of supporting a minimum of 854 standard
ASCII characters to minimize or eliminate the levels of navigation required for access to
information when responding to critical emergencies and abnormal system conditions. The
QVGA operator interface shall provide operator prompts and six context sensitive soft-keys
for intuitive operation. Expanded content, multi-line operator interfaces shall be capable of
providing the following functions:
1.
Dual language operation with Instant-Switch language selection during runtime.
2.
Activity display choices for:
3.
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
a.
First 8 Events.
b.
First 5 Events and Most Recent Event (with first and most recent event time and
date stamps).
c.
First Event and Most Recent Event (with first and most recent event time and date
stamps).
d.
Scrollable List Display [displays a scrollable list of active points for the event
category (alarm, priority 2, supervisory, or trouble) selected. The position in this
list shall be the last acknowledged point (not flashing) at the top followed by the
next 7 unacknowledged points (flashing)].
e.
General Event Status (alarm, priority 2, supervisory, or trouble in system)
Equal or Hierarchal Priority Assignment: Each operator interface shall be programmable
to allow multiple operator interfaces to have equal operation priority or to allow
hierarchal priority control to be assigned to individual operator locations.
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 23
08 JAN 2016
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
2.3
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
4.
Custom Messages: Up to 50 custom point detail messages for providing additional point
specific information in detailed point status screens.
5.
Bitmap Import: Bitmap file import for operator interface display of site plan and
background watermark images. Site plan status icons shall indicate area status for highest
priority active events.
NETWORK DISPLAY UNITS
A. Network Display Unit shall contain the following features:
2.4
1.
80 column by 2 line, or the capability for 854 character, expanded content multi-line
QVGA, LCD display to indicate alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and
shall include a keypad for use in entering and executing control commands.
2.
Capacity to annunciate 12,000 network points and/or point lists.
3.
Historical event logs shall maintain separate 600 Alarm and 600 Trouble events.
4.
The network shall provide a means to log into any node on the system via a laptop
computer or TSW and have complete network access (Set Host) for diagnostics,
maintenance reporting, and information gathering of all nodes in the system. Systems not
meeting this requirement must provide all diagnostic tools required to support this
function from selected points on the network.
SYSTEM GRAPHIC WORKSTATIONS
A. Provide Simplex 4190 TrueSite Workstations if required per the design. Locations shall be as
identified on the Contract Drawings.
B. The workstations shall include 50,000 point capability, and shall provide both graphical and
textural status of each addressable device connected to the Fire Alarm Network.
C. Supplemental workstations are not required to be UL864 listed equipment. Supplemental
TrueSite Workstation requirements shall comply with minimum manufacturer’s system and
hardware requirements plus the following:
1.
Industrial Grade Personal Computer with detachable keyboard
2.
Core 2 Duo 2.16 GHz CPU, or in accordance with minimum requirements set by the
manufacturer.
3.
3 GB RAM
4.
160 GB Hard Drive
5.
CD/DVD R/W
6.
SVGA video output with onboard video capability for up to two displays (1) SVGA and
(1) DVI,
7.
1 Serial port
8.
3 USB ports
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 24
08 JAN 2016
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
9.
1 PCI slot for tall interface card
10.
Windows 7 Professional Software
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
D. Monitors:
1.
2.
Primary monitors
a.
Where supporting a UL864 listed workstation, the Primary monitor shall be listed
with the workstation.
b.
Primary monitors for supplemental workstations shall be approximately 27”, nontouch screen.
Secondary monitors
a.
E.
F.
Where required, provide approximately 42”, touch screen monitor. Where
supporting a UL864 listed workstation, the monitor is to be UL864 listed.
The TrueSite Workstations shall operate by receiving system events and displaying specified
graphic representations of the Complex and system devices. Workstations shall include the
following functionality:
1.
Pre-programmed functions
2.
Field editor for graphics representations
3.
A fully functional Network Node communicating on the network. Capability to interface
with up to seven (7) Network Loops
4.
Hardware and software to network as client/server application with multiple TSW.
The monitors shall serve as the interactive interface between the operator and the network
system. The operator shall be able to perform the following tasks:
1.
Silence signals
2.
Acknowledge all alarm and return to normal conditions
3.
Reset system
4.
Display list menus
5.
Select the individual message screens
6.
Perform manual operation of system(s) control points
7.
Request the "HELP" menu
8.
Perform operator login / logout
9.
Connect (Set Host) to other nodes
10.
Perform graphic editing functions
11.
Set the system time and date
G. The unit shall be equipped with password-protected access levels.
H. TrueSite System Operating Modes:
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 25
08 JAN 2016
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
1.
Most areas of the Complex are provided with smoke control systems. TSW monitors
shall be used to display information required to be provided on the Firefighter Smoke
Control Station (FSCS).
2.
Monitors at each workstation shall provide general information as follows:
a.
The primary monitor is to be used to provide general information including device
list views, history logs, and general system navigation. In general, the primary
monitor interface shall initiate graphics on the secondary monitor in the room.
b.
At locations identified with a secondary monitor on the contract drawings, the
secondary monitor shall show the building floor plan at an appropriate scale and be
capable of indicating a graphic representation of the smoke control system. Toggle
between the floor plan and the smoke control system shall be accomplished with
an easily identified button.
3.
It is desired that the system shall allow command and control of equipment in multiple
locations simultaneously. At a minimum, command and control of two events in separate
buildings shall be possible without interference or limitation.
4.
When an alarm occurs at the Complex, the workstations shall automatically display the
building floor plan at an appropriate scale, either on a separate monitor, and display
smoke control information on the adjacent monitor or screen. The system shall not allow
any control or interface with the system until an authorized person has logged into the
workstation at an appropriate level, at which time full control for the system is allowed.
5.
When no alarms or troubles are present, the primary monitor shall display a graphics
screen menu used to access other graphic screens.
6.
Upon activation of any alarm, and on request by the operator, the secondary monitor shall
display the floor plan of the floor in alarm with all devices shown. The device in alarm
shall flash until acknowledged. The device in alarm shall then become steady until
cleared.
7.
Built-in diagnostics shall provide graphical views of the network topology and status.
Network communication breaks or inactive nodes shall be clearly indicated as a guide in
returning the system to normal.
8.
Individual point access shall display "real-time" analog sensor point information.
9.
Provide graphical screens on each Workstation. These screens shall be identical on each
Workstation.
10.
Screens shall be dynamic, and include “pan” and “zoom” capability. An operator shall
have the capability to zoom out to an overall view, or to zoom in to a device level view
to ascertain all associated information associated with each addressable device on the
system.
11.
The status of each smoke zone’s operation (normal, pressurize, exhaust, off) shall be
indicated on the graphical screen. Manual override of each smoke zone’s operation shall
be available to the operator by activation of clearly defined icons on the screens.
12.
System topology screens shall be provided to show the communication status of all nodes
on the system, as well as their communicating relationship with all other nodes on the
network.
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 26
08 JAN 2016
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
I.
J.
2.5
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
13.
Report generation shall be provided within each workstation, to allow operators to
document system historical events and structured reports as required.
14.
Provide security door status and override control functions on each TSW. Unlocking
operation shall be provided for doors within each smoke compartment.
15.
Provide status of all fire suppression systems connected to the system by either
monitoring status of the system directly or by monitoring status of a separate releasing
panel for trouble, supervisory, and alarm conditions. New and renovated suppression
systems utilizing separate releasing panels shall also monitor for Suppression Discharge
if an alarm condition can occur without suppression discharge.
Remote Ethernet Client Support: The TrueSite Graphical Workstation server shall be capable of
supporting up to 10 Simultaneous Remote Client Connections over Ethernet (maximum of 5
supervised clients and 5 unsupervised clients total combined).
1.
Remote Clients shall be configurable for "Restricted Feature" view only or for "Protected
Feature" full control operation.
2.
A minimum 3 Mb/s connection speed shall be provided to Remote Clients.
3.
Logins/Logouts at Remote Clients shall be logged in the Historical Log. Supervised
Clients shall be specified by client name.
4.
The Graphical Workstation server shall be capable of supporting both Agency Listed Fire
Alarm Ethernet LAN Applications and Supplemental Annunciation over the Customer's
Ethernet LAN/WAN. Where a Fire Alarm Ethernet LAN is specified only Agency Listed
Ethernet hardware shall be installed.
Uninterruptible Power Supply
1.
Where required, Uninterruptible Power Supply shall be in accordance with DEN
standards.
2.
Where required to support UL 864 listed workstations, the Uninterruptible Power Supply
shall be UL 1481 listed.
PRINTERS
A. Event printers are not required as part of this project.
2.6
STANDARD NOTIFICATION POWER EXTENDER PANELS
A. Standard notification shall be provided in the Airport Office Building, Central Utility Plant,
Concourse A, the AGTS Maintenance Building, and in certain AGTS spaces located between
the AGTS Tunnels.
1.
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
The IDNet NAC Power Extender panel shall be a stand-alone panel capable of powering
a minimum of 4 notification appliance circuits. Notification appliance circuits shall be
Class B, Style Y rated at 2 amps each. Panel shall provide capability to be expanded to 8
notification appliance circuits. Simplex 4009-9201.
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 27
08 JAN 2016
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
2.7
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
2.
The internal power supply & battery charger shall be capable of charging up 12 Ah
batteries internally mounted.
3.
The NAC extender panel may be mounted close to the host control panel or can be
remotely located. The IDNET Addressable NAC Extender Panel, when connected to an
addressable panel, shall connect to the host panel via an IDNet communications channel.
Via the IDNET channel each output NAC can be individually controlled for general
alarm or selective area notification.
4.
Alarms from the host fire alarm control panel shall signal the NAC power extender panel
to activate. The panel shall monitor itself and each of its NACs for trouble conditions and
shall report trouble conditions to the host panel.
5.
The IDNet NAC Power Extender panel shall be a stand-alone panel capable of powering
a minimum of 4 notification appliance circuits. Notification appliance circuits shall be
Class B, Style Y rated at 2 amps each. Panel shall provide capability to be expanded to 8
notification appliance circuits. The strobes shall not drift out of synchronization at any
time during operation. If the sync module or Power Supply fails to operate, (i.e., contacts
remain closed), the strobe shall revert to a non-synchronized flash-rate. The appliance
shall also be designed so that the audible signal may be silenced while maintaining strobe
activation when used with Wheelock synchronization.
6.
The IDNet NAC Power Extender panel shall have the Wheelock Patented Sync Protocol
integrated into the panel for strobe synchronization, and not require the use of external
sync modules. All IDNet NAC Power Extender panels and internal 4100ES power
supplies shall sync together on the host 4100ES panel.
7.
Node to node synchronization of strobes shall be required.
8.
For IDNet connected NAC extender panels up to ten (10) panels can be connected on a
single IDNet channel.
ADDRESSABLE NOTIFICATION POWER PANELS
A. Addressable notification shall be provided in Concourse B.
B. Addressable notification shall be powered and controlled by Enhanced Power Supplies (EPS).
With IDNac SLCs to addressable notification appliances, a constant 29 VRMS source voltage
is maintained, even during battery standby, allowing strobes to operate at higher voltage with
lower current and ensuring a consistent current draw and voltage drop margin under both
primary power and secondary battery standby.
C. IDNac SLC power supplies shall provide three on-board 3 Amp IDNac SLCs. Each SLC shall
provide up to 63 addresses and up to 75 unit loads. Simplex 4100-5325.
D. The EPS power supply shall be mounted in an FACP or Transponder as specified by
SimplexGrinnell.
E.
Each IDNac addressable notification appliance shall be individually programmed and controlled
for general alarm or selective area notification.
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 28
08 JAN 2016
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
F.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
The host fire alarm control panel shall signal the IDNAC power supply to activate. The panel
shall monitor itself and each of its IDNACs for trouble conditions and shall report trouble
conditions to the host panel.
G. The IDNac Power Supply shall have the Simplex Sync Protocol integrated into the panel for
strobe synchronization, and not require the use of external sync modules. All IDNac Power
Supplies and internal 4100ES power supplies shall sync together on the host 4100ES panel.
H. Node to node synchronization of strobes shall be required.
I.
2.8
If required, field-mounted 4009 IDNac Repeater Panels shall be used to extend the power and
distance of the IDNac SLCs. The Repeater shall provide an additional 3 Amps of power and
requires one IDNac SLC address. Repeaters can be connected as one in series or up to five
(5) in parallel. The Repeater shall include a built-in battery charger and charge up to 12.7 Ah
batteries for in cabinet mounting. Simplex 4009-9601.
INITIATING DEVICES
A. General
1.
Devices shall receive power and communication from the same pair of wires. For faulttolerant circuits, any separate power wiring shall also be made fault-tolerant.
2.
All sensors shall be of the intelligent type. All sensors shall mount on a common base.
3.
Conventional fire alarm initiating devices (manual pull stations, water flow and tamper
switches, pressure switches) shall each be individually addressable via addressable
modules.
B. Addressable Manual Pull Stations
1.
Addressable double-action push-pull type, red LEXAN, with molded, raised-letter
operating instructions of contrasting color. Station shall mechanically latch upon
operation and remain so until manually reset by opening with a key common with the
control units. Simplex 4009-9003.
C. Conventional Manual Pull Stations
1.
Conventional and weather-proof manual pull stations shall be provided where required
and indicated on the drawings.
2.
Conventional manual pull stations shall be capable of being opened without initiating an
alarm condition. Provide Firelite model BG-12 product line, dual action. Standard
models will be:
a.
Conventional: Firelite BG-12L
b.
Weatherproof: Firelite BG-12LOB
D. Smoke Sensors
1.
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
Smoke sensors shall be of the photoelectric or combination photoelectric / heat type.
Simplex 4098-9714 photoelectric sensor, Simplex 4098-9754 combination
photoelectric/heat.
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 29
08 JAN 2016
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
2.
Relay output, sounder and isolator bases shall be supported alternatives to the standard
base. Address shall reside in the detector base and not the sensor. Simplex 4098-9792
(4098-9789 with remote LED driver) and 4098-9832 trim ring.
3.
Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to
restore normal operation.
4.
Plug-In Arrangement: Sensor and associated electronic components are mounted in a
module that connects to a fixed base with a twist-locking plug connection. Base shall
provide break-off plastic tab that can be removed to engage the head/base locking
mechanism. No special tools shall be required to remove the detector head once it has
been locked. Removal of the detector head shall interrupt the supervisory circuit of the
fire alarm detection loop and cause a trouble signal at the control unit.
5.
Each sensor base shall contain an LED that will flash each time it is scanned by the
Control Unit. In alarm condition, the sensor base LED shall be on steady.
6.
Each sensor base shall contain a magnetically actuated test switch to provide for easy
alarm testing at the sensor location.
7.
Each sensor shall be scanned by the Control Unit for its type identification to prevent
inadvertent substitution of another sensor type. Upon detection of a "wrong device", the
control unit shall operate with the installed device at the default alarm settings for that
sensor; 2.5% obscuration for photoelectric sensor, 135-deg F and 15-deg F rate-of-rise
for the heat sensor, but shall indicate a "Wrong Device" trouble condition.
8.
The sensor's electronics shall be immune from nuisance alarms caused by EMI and RFI.
9.
Sensors shall include a communication transmitter and receiver in the mounting base
having a unique identification and capability for status reporting to the FACP.
10.
Removal of the sensor head for cleaning shall not require the setting of addresses.
11.
Device address shall reside in the permanently installed base.
12.
Monitoring: FACP shall individually monitor sensors for calibration, sensitivity, and
alarm condition, and shall individually adjust for sensitivity. The control unit shall
determine the condition of each sensor by comparing the sensor value to the stored
values.
13.
Environmental Compensation: The FACP shall maintain a moving average of the sensor's
smoke chamber value to automatically compensate for dust, dirt, and other conditions
that could affect detection operations.
14.
Programmable Sensitivity: Photoelectric Smoke Sensors shall have 7 selectable
sensitivity levels ranging from 0.2% to 3.7%/ft obscuration, programmed and monitored
from the FACP.
15.
Sensitivity Testing Reports: The FACP shall provide sensor reports that meet NFPA 72
calibrated test method requirements. The reports shall be viewed on a TSW or printed
for annual recording and logging of the calibration maintenance schedule.
16.
Sensor Cleaning: The FACP shall automatically indicate when an individual sensor needs
cleaning. A trouble condition shall be activated when a sensor's average value reaches a
predetermined value indicating that it is dirty. Three (3) progressive levels of reporting
shall be provided.
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 30
08 JAN 2016
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
E.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
17.
Almost Dirty: The first level shall indicate if a sensor is close to a trouble reporting
condition and will be indicated on the FACP as "ALMOST DIRTY SENSOR." This
condition provides a means to alert maintenance staff of a sensor approaching dirty
without creating a trouble in the system.
18.
Dirty Sensor: If the first level indicator is ignored and the second level is reached, a
"DIRTY SENSOR" condition shall be indicated at the FACP and subsequently a system
trouble is reported to the Supervising Station. The sensor base LED shall glow steady
giving a visible indication at the sensor location. The "DIRTY SENSOR" condition shall
not affect the sensitivity level required to alarm the sensor.
19.
Excessively Dirty: If a "DIRTY SENSOR" is left unattended, and its average value
increases to a third predetermined value, an "EXCESSIVELY DIRTY SENSOR" trouble
condition shall be indicated at the control unit.
20.
Sensor Self Test: The FACP shall continuously perform an automatic self-test on each
sensor that will check sensor electronics and ensure the accuracy of the values being
transmitted. Any sensor that fails this test shall indicate a "SELF TEST ABNORMAL"
trouble condition.
21.
Multi-Sensors: Multi-Sensors shall combine photoelectric smoke sensing and heat
sensing technologies. An alarm shall be determined by either smoke detection, with
selectable sensitivity from 0.2 to 3.7 %/ft obscuration; or heat detection, selectable as
fixed temperature or fixed with selectable rate-of-rise; or based on an analysis of the
combination of smoke and heat activity. Each detection type shall be independent
operation from the other and not combine sensing technologies.
22.
Magnet Test: Magnet test activation of smoke sensors shall be distinguished by its label
and history log entry as being activated by a magnet.
23.
Smoke detectors associated with suppression release shall be provided with a red detector
base or separate red base ring.
Duct Smoke Sensor
1.
Photoelectric type, with sampling tube of design and dimensions as recommended by the
manufacturer for the specific duct size and installation conditions. Sensor includes relay
as required for fan shutdown. Simplex 4098-9756 housing with 2098-9806 remote
test/LED station.
2.
Duct detectors shall be readably accessible and located and installed to allow testing,
removal and replacement without disassembly of any other equipment or building items.
3.
The Air Duct Housing unit shall be designed for detection of combustion products and/or
smoke in air conditioning and ventilation system ducts in compliance with National Fire
Protection Association Standard 90A. The assembly shall consist of a housing to
accommodate sampling tubes which extend into and across the duct to the ventilation
system.
4.
The sampling chamber shall be designed to ensure uniform sensitivity in air velocities
from 500 feet per minute to 4000 feet per minute. Inlet sampling tube length shall be
determined by the width of the air duct being protected.
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 31
08 JAN 2016
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
F.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
5.
While the fans are operating, a continuous cross-sectional sampling of air from the duct
shall flow through the selected photoelectric detector, after which the sampled air shall
be returned to the duct.
6.
Air handling equipment shall incorporate air duct detectors per code requirements. The
air duct housing shall incorporate a relay to shut down the air handling devices in
addition to sending a supervisory alarm signal to the FACP. The housing shall contain a
LED to indicate when the detector is in alarm.
7.
The Air Duct Housing shall be mounted directly outside of the air duct. A template shall
be provided for making necessary cut-outs and holes. Complete instructions shall be
supplied with the unit.
8.
Detectors shall operate on 24 VDC, and shall be powered from the panel via separate 24
VDC supply circuit.
9.
Environmental compensation, programmable sensitivity settings, status testing, and
monitoring of sensor dirt accumulation for the duct smoke sensor shall be provided by
the FACP.
10.
The Duct Housing shall provide an auxiliary relay. This auxiliary relay output shall be
fully programmable.
11.
Duct Housing shall provide a relay control trouble indicator Yellow LED.
12.
Duct Housing shall provide two (2) Test Ports for measuring airflow and for testing.
These ports will allow aerosol injection in order to test the activation of the duct smoke
sensor.
13.
Duct Housing shall provide a magnetic test area and Red sensor status LED.
14.
For maintenance purposes, it shall be possible to clean the duct housing sampling tubes
by accessing them through the duct housing front cover.
15.
Each duct smoke sensor shall have a Remote Test Station with an alarm LED and test
switch mounted at an accessible location no more than 7 feet above finished floor.
16.
Where indicated, provide NEMA 4X weatherproof duct housing enclosures that shall
provide for the circulation of conditioned air around the internally mounted addressable
duct sensor housing to maintain the sensor housing at its rated temperature range. The
housing shall be UL Listed to Standard 268A.
Air Sampling Duct Detectors
1.
Provide a Simplex XAD100 or XAD200 when duct smoke detectors are required to be
provided at locations that are inaccessible for maintenance as identified on the shop
drawings. Coordinate applicable locations with DEN maintenance/Life Safety personnel.
DEN Life Safety to approve in advance the installation of any air sampling duct
detection.
G. Beam Smoke Detectors
1.
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
Provide Xtralis OSID Smoke Detectors, or approved equal, to replace existing beam
detectors. Features of beam detectors shall include the following:
a.
Operates over distances between emitter and receiver of up to 500 ft (153 m).
b.
Built-in alignment sights and tamper protection.
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 32
08 JAN 2016
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
adjustment,
signal
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
c.
Automatic range
adjustment.
synchronization,
and
contamination
d.
To be supplied with permanent power, not battery operated. Use high-power wired
(HPW) devices.
e.
Exact model selected shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and
specifications for location.
H. Heat Sensors
I.
1.
Combination fixed-temperature and rate-of-rise unit with plug-in base and alarm
indication lamp; 135-deg F fixed-temperature with rate of rise setting except as
indicated. Simplex 4098-9733.
2.
Thermal sensor shall be of the epoxy encapsulated electronic design. It shall be
thermistor-based, rate-compensated, self-restoring and shall not be affected by thermal
lag.
3.
Sensor fixed temperature sensing shall be independent of rate-of-rise sensing and
programmable to operate at 135-deg F or 155-deg F. Sensor rate-of-rise temperature
detection shall be selectable at the FACP for either 15-deg F or 20-deg F per minute.
4.
Sensor shall have the capability to be programmed as a utility monitoring device to
monitor for temperature extremes in the range from 32-deg F to 155-deg F.
Combination Smoke and Heat Sensor
1.
J.
The combination smoke and heat sensor shall comply with applicable sections above for
both functions. Simplex 4098-9754.
Conventional Heat Detectors
1.
Where required due to ambient conditions, a conventional fixed temperature heat detector
shall be provided. Use Thermotech Model 302, labeled as Simplex 2098-9486, or
approved equal.
K. Linear Heat Detection
1.
Where indicated on the drawings, linear heat detection shall be provided. Use
ThermoCable Digital Linear Heat Detection Cable (LHD), part number TC172, or
approved equal. TC172 has a UL Listed temperature rating of 172°F (78°C) and a UL
Listed Spacing of 35 feet. LHD shall utilize HDPE (Polypropylene) chemical resistant
sheathing.
2.
ThermoCable Linear Heat Detection Cable shall be installed using like-manufactured
peripheral devices including Single or Double-Loop Cable Ties, NEMA 4X rated
Junction Box, NEMA 4X rated ELR-Box, Cable Strain Relief Connector, Splicing
Block, and Sealant Tape. Splicing Tape shall not be used. In some cases, a steel
guidewire may be required with the use of eyebolts and turnbuckles as detailed in the
drawings.
3.
ThermoCable Linear Heat Detection Cable shall be installed following all manufacturer’s
recommended installation instructions. LHD cable splices shall only be allowed within a
Junction Box and only with the use of a Splicing Block.
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 33
08 JAN 2016
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
4.
2.9
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
ThermoCable Linear Heat Detection Cable shall be monitored through the use of a
Simplex 4098-9101 IDNet Class B Monitor ZAM.
MODULE DEVICES
A. Monitor Modules: The Monitor Module shall provide an addressable input for N.O. or N.C.
contact devices including but not limited to manual stations, water-flow switches, sprinkler
supervisory devices, temperature sensors, door contacts, fire\smoke dampers, intrusion
detectors, etc. The Monitor Module shall provide a supervised initiating circuit. Upon
determination of an alarm condition, the LED shall be latched on. The Module shall contain a
LED which blinks upon being scanned by the FACP. The Module shall mount in a standard
electrical box. Simplex 4090-9001.
B. Control Modules: The Control Module shall provide an addressable output for a separatelypowered alarm-indicating circuit or for a control relay. The Control Module shall provide a
supervised indicating circuit where indicated on the plans. An open-circuit fault shall be
annunciated at the FACP. The Control Module shall provide a control relay where indicated
on the plans. The relay contacts shall be SPST (Form "C" rated at 2 amps @ 28 VDC).
Voltage on detector contacts shall not exceed 24 Volts. The module shall contain an LED
which blinks upon being scanned by the FACP. The module shall mount in a standard
electrical box. Simplex 4090-9002.
C. Control Relays: Provide control relays compliant with Code requirements. Provide control
relays as required to accomplish functions such as fan shut-down, damper positioning, device
release, etc. Relays shall have 24 VDC coils, with DPDT contacts rated at 10A, minimum, at
120 VAC, shall be provided with screw terminals, and shall be UL listed as fire alarm control
accessories. Relay enclosures shall provide conduit knockouts at top and bottom, and shall
have manufacturer's standard finish. Control relays shall be installed near the associated fire
alarm system control modules. Control relays shall be individually programmable by the
system to respond automatically in the event of an alarm by related sensors or other devices.
Manual control of fans, dampers and required relays shall be provided, as well as automatic
control where required. Control sequences shall be as indicated on related mechanical systems
control drawings. Simplex 2088-9021 or equal.
D. Fault Isolator Module: The Fault Isolator Module shall detect and isolate a short-circuited
segment of a fire alarm SLC. Simplex 4090-9116.
E.
Addressable Circuit Interface Modules:
1.
Arrange Addressable Circuit Interface Modules to monitor or control one or more system
components that are not otherwise equipped for addressable communication. Modules
shall be used for monitoring of water flow, valve tamper, non-addressable devices, and
for control of mechanical systems.
2.
Addressable Circuit Interface Modules shall be capable of mounting in a standard electric
outlet box. Modules shall include cover plates to allow surface or flush mounting.
Modules shall receive their operating power from the signaling line circuit or a separate
two wire pair running from an appropriate power supply, as required.
3.
There shall be the following types of modules:
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 34
08 JAN 2016
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
a.
Type 1: Monitor Circuit Interface Module:
1)
For conventional 2-wire smoke detector and/or contact device monitoring
with Class B supervision. The supervision of the zone wiring shall be Class
B. This module shall communicate status (normal, alarm, trouble) to the
FACP. Provide 4090-9101 Monitor ZAM, with 4090-9801 (semi-flush) or
4090-9802 (surface) 4” square / 2 gang cover with LED viewport which
indicates device status.
2)
To eliminate the requirement for additional addressable modules, associated
installation, programming, and service requirements, provide monitor
modules with built-in power reset capability for conventional 4-wire smoke
detector with Class B wiring supervision. The module shall provide detector
reset capability and over-current power protection for the 4-wire detector.
This module shall communicate status (normal, alarm, trouble) to the FACP.
Provide 4090-9101 Monitor ZAM, with 4090-9801(semi-flush) or 40909802 (surface) 4” square / 2 gang cover with LED viewport which indicates
device status.
3)
Relay IAMs without LED indication are not acceptable (e.g., 4090-9118).
b.
Type 2: Line Powered Monitor Circuit Interface Module
1)
Where required, provide individually addressable modules that have both
power and communications supplied by the two wire signaling line circuit.
It provides location specific addressability to an initiating device by
monitoring normally open dry contacts. This module shall have the
capability of communicating four zone status conditions (normal, alarm,
current limited, trouble) to the FACP. Provide Simplex 4090-9001 Monitor
IAM with 4090-9806 (semi-flush) or 4090-9807 (surface) cover for single
gang box with viewport of device status LED.
2)
Where required, provide modules with location specific addressability for
up to five initiating devices by monitoring normally closed or normally open
dry contact security devices. The module shall communicate four zone
status conditions (open, normal, abnormal, and short). The two-wire
signaling line circuit shall supply power and communications to the module.
Simplex 4090-9121 IAM.
c.
Type 3: Single Address Multi-Point Interface Modules
1)
Where control and monitoring are required at one location, provide efficient
multi-state modules to decrease the quantity of addressable devices and
potential service issues, and to increase overall efficiency of the system.
This multipoint module shall provide location specific addressability for
four initiating circuits and control two output relays from a single address.
Inputs shall provide supervised monitoring of normally open, dry contacts
and be capable of communicating four zone status conditions (normal, open,
current limited, and short). The input circuits and output relay operation
shall be controlled independently and disabled separately. Provide Simplex
4090-9120, with 4090-9801 (semi-flush) or 4090-9802 (surface) 4” square /
2 gang cover with LED viewport which indicates device status.
2)
Provide a supervised multi-state input and a relay output, using a single
address. The input shall provide supervised monitoring of two normally
open, dry contacts with a single point and be capable of communicating four
zone status conditions (normal, open, current limited, and short). The twowire signaling line circuit shall supply power and communications to the
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 35
08 JAN 2016
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
3)
2.10
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
module. This module shall have a control point output, and monitor 2 points
of inputs in a common device. Simplex 4090-9118, with 4090-9801 (semiflush) or 4090-9802 (surface) 4” square / 2 gang cover with LED viewport
which indicates device status.
This dual point module shall monitor an unsupervised normally open, dry
contact with one point and control an output relay with the other point, using
a single address. The two-wire signaling line circuit shall supply power and
communications to the module. Provide Simplex 4090-9119 with 40909801 (semi-flush) or 4090-9802 (surface) 4” square / 2 gang cover with
LED viewport which indicates device status.
4.
All Circuit Interface Modules shall be supervised and uniquely identified by the control
unit. Module identification shall be transmitted to the control unit for processing
according to the program instructions. Modules shall have an on-board LED to provide
an indication that the module is powered and communicating with the FACP. The LEDs
shall provide a troubleshooting aid since the LED blinks on poll whenever the peripheral
is powered and communicating.
5.
The system shall support 100% of addressable devices in alarm or operated at the same
time. Simultaneous operation of each and every control point shall be sustainable even
during the condition when every addressable point is in alarm or active condition, under
both primary (AC) and secondary (battery) power conditions.
SUPPRESSION INTERFACE DEVICES
A. Fire Suppression (Pre-Action / Deluge) Releasing Peripherals
2.11
1.
Interface to Fire Suppression Releasing Solenoids shall be through UL Listed Fire
Releasing Peripheral, Simplex 4090-9006. This device provides supervised control
circuitry to the solenoid, and receives dual inputs from the associated Fire Alarm Control
Panel to ensure suppression release is activated only upon confirmed alarm conditions
and not inadvertently tripped by a single operation.
2.
Connect this releasing peripheral to solenoids UL listed as compatible with the releasing
peripheral. Replace all existing solenoids that will be connected to a new Fire
Suppression Releasing Solenoid with a listed compatible solenoid.
3.
Provide Simplex 2081-9046 Coil Supervision Modules at the Solenoid location to
monitor the electrical integrity of the releasing solenoid.
4.
Provide Simplex 2080-9059 Maintenance Switch with Disconnect Lamp, or approved
equal, for prevention of accidental discharge during normal maintenance of the releasing
system.
NOTIFICATION DEVICES
A. The fire alarm system shall interface with the existing Emergency Communication System
(ECS). Audible notification of fire events and non-fire events shall occur through the ECS.
Visual indication shall be powered and controlled by the fire alarm system. Textual visual
notification shall be a combination of fire alarm and ECS controlled signage. Contractor shall
coordinate with Owner for ECS interface as required.
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 36
08 JAN 2016
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
B. Audible devices powered and controlled directly from the fire alarm system shall be limited to
auxiliary devices provided to meet specific notification requirements (e.g., audible devices at
sprinkler fire department connections) and in areas where ECS audibility or intelligibility
cannot be provided, (e.g., electrical and mechanical rooms).
C. Horn/Strobes and Strobes:
1.
Electronic fire alarm signals shall be combination horn and strobe type or strobe only
type where shown on drawings. The audible signal and strobe shall operate
independently or in unison.
2.
Devices shall be mounted on ceilings or on walls as indicated on Contract Documents,
and shall be UL listed for specific mounting configuration. Column-mounted devices in
equipment rooms shall be surface-mounted. Mounting height of new devices on
columns or walls shall comply with NFPA and ADA requirements.
D. Notification Appliance Circuit provides synchronization of strobes at a rate of 1 Hz. The
capability to synchronize multiple notification appliance circuits shall be provided.
E.
Standard Notification Appliances
1.
Standard notification appliances shall be provided in the Airport Office Building, Central
Utility Plant, Concourse A, the AGTS Maintenance Building, and in certain AGTS
spaces located between the AGTS Tunnels.
2.
The standard notification appliances shall be Wheelock® (Eaton Cooper Notification)
Exceder™ Series HS Audible Strobe appliances, Series ST Visual Strobe appliances and
Series HN Audible appliances or approved equals. The Series HS and ST Strobes shall
be listed for UL Standard 1971 (Emergency Devices for the Hearing-Impaired) for
Indoor Fire Protection Service. The Series HS and HN Audibles shall be UL Listed
under Standard 464 (Fire Protective Signaling). All Series shall meet the requirements of
FCC Part 15 Class B. All inputs shall be compatible with standard reverse polarity
supervision of circuit wiring by a Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) with the ability to
operate from 8 to 33 VDC. Indoor wall models shall incorporate voltage test points for
easy voltage inspection.
3.
Standard models will be:
4.
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
a.
HSW-AL
b.
HSWC-AL
c.
STW-AL
d.
STWC-AL
The Series HS Audible Strobe and ST Strobe appliances shall produce a flash rate of one
(1) flash per second over the Regulated Voltage Range and shall incorporate a Xenon
flash tube enclosed in a rugged Lexan® lens. The Series shall be of low current design.
Where Multi-Candela appliances are specified, the strobe intensity shall have 8 field
selectable settings at 15, 15/75, 30, 75, 95, 110, 135, 185 candela for wall mount and 15,
30, 60, 75, 95, 115, 150, 177 candela for ceiling mount. The selector switch for selecting
the candela shall be tamper resistant. The 15/75 candela strobe shall be specified when
15 candela UL Standard 1971 Listing with 75 candela on-axis is required (e.g. ADA
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 37
08 JAN 2016
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
compliance). Appliances with candela settings shall show the candela selection in a
visible location at all times when installed.
5.
The audible shall have a minimum of three (3) field selectable settings for dBA levels
and shall have a choice of continuous or temporal (Code 3) audible outputs. Audible
notification shall utilize temporal (Code 3) outputs.
6.
The Series HS Audible Strobe, ST Strobe and Series HN Audible shall incorporate a
patented Universal Mounting Base that shall allow mounting to a single-gang, doublegang, 4-inch square, 3.5-inch octal, 4-inch octal or 100mm European type back boxes.
Two wire appliance wiring shall be capable of directly connecting to the mounting base.
Continuity checking of the entire NAC circuit prior to attaching any notification
appliances shall be allowed. Product shall come with Contact Cover to protect contact
springs. Removal of an appliance shall result in a supervision fault condition by the Fire
Alarm Control Panel (FACP). The mounting base shall be the same base among all horn,
strobe, horn strobe, wall and ceiling models. All notification appliances shall be
backwards compatible.
7.
The Series HS and ST wall models shall have a low profile measuring 5.24” H x 4.58” W
x 2.19” D. Series HN wall shall measure 5.24” H x 4.58” W x 1.6” D. The Series HSC
and STC shall been round and have a low profile with a diameter of 6.68” x 2.63” D.
Series HNC ceiling shall have a diameter of 6.68” x 1.50” D.
8.
When synchronization is required, the appliance shall be compatible with Wheelock®’s
SM, DSM Sync Modules, Wheelock® Power Supplies or other manufacturer’s panels
with built-in Wheelock® Patented Sync Protocol. The strobes shall not drift out of
synchronization at any time during operation. If the sync protocol fails to operate, the
strobe shall revert to a non-synchronized flash-rate and still maintain (1) flash per second
over its Regulated Voltage Range. The appliance shall also be designed so that the
audible signal may be silenced while maintaining strobe activation when used with
Wheelock® synchronization protocol.
9.
Wall Appliances – UL Standard 1971, UL Standard 464, California State Fire Marshal
(CSFM), ULC, FM
10.
Ceiling Appliances – UL Standard 1971, UL Standard 464, California State Fire Marshal
(CSFM), ULC, FM
11.
Color:
12.
F.
a.
White for Public and Sterile Areas including AOB Level 6-10, all AGTS Stations,
Concourses Level 2 and above, Terminal Levels 5 and 6, and public areas of
Terminal Levels 1, 2, 3, and 4.
b.
Red for back-of-house areas including AOB Level 4, 5A, 5B, and 11, Central
Plant, Concourses Level 0 and 1, Terminal Level 3, 4 and 7, non-public areas of
Terminal Level 1 and 2, and the AGTS Maintenance Building.
For outside or unconditioned locations, provide weatherproof appliances, Wheelock
ASWP Audible Strobes or approved equal.
Addressable Notification Appliances
1.
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
Addressable notification shall be provided in the Terminal (Main and North), Concourse
B, and Concourse C.
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 38
08 JAN 2016
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
2.
The addressable notification appliances shall be Simplex TrueAlert ES Addressable
Notification Appliances series Audible/Visual appliances, Visual Strobe appliances, and
Audible appliances or approved equals. The Strobes shall be listed for UL Standard 1971
(Emergency Devices for the Hearing-Impaired) for Indoor Fire Protection Service. The
Audibles shall be UL Listed under Standard 464 (Fire Protective Signaling). All inputs
shall be compatible with addressable notification controlled by IDNac SLCs from
Simplex 4100ES fire alarm control panels with EPS/EPS+ power supplies and 4009
IDNac Repeaters providing a regulated 29VRMS allowing strobes to operate with lower
current even under battery backup.
3.
Standard models will be:
a.
49VO-WWA (Strobe, Wall, White, ALERT)
b.
49VO-WRA (Strobe, Wall, Red, ALERT)
c.
4906-9204 w/ White Alert Cover (Strobe, Ceiling, White, ALERT)
d.
4906-9202 w/ Red Alert Cover (Strobe, Ceiling, Red, ALERT)
e.
49AV-APPLW, 49AVC-WRALT, 49MP-AVVOWR (Horn/Strobe, Wall, Red,
ALERT)
f.
49AV-APPLW-O, 49AVC-WRALT-O, 49WPBB-AVVOWR (Horn/Strobe, Wall,
Red, ALERT, Weatherproof)
g.
49AV-APPLW-O, 49AVC-WRFIRE-O, 49WPBB-AVVOWR (Horn/Strobe,
Wall, Red, FIRE, Weatherproof, for use at Fire Department Connections)
4.
Strobe appliances shall produce a flash rate of one (1) flash per second over the
Regulated Voltage Range and shall incorporate a Xenon flash tube enclosed in a rugged
Lexan® lens. Where Multi-Candela appliances are specified, the strobe intensity shall be
programmable from the control panel or jumper selected as 15, 30, 75, 110, 135, or 185
candela for wall mount and 15, 30, 75, or 110 candela for ceiling mount. Appliances
with candela settings shall show the candela selection in a visible location at all times
when installed.
5.
The audible shall have a minimum of two (2) field selectable settings for High or Low
dBA levels and shall have a choice of continuous or temporal (Code 3) audible outputs.
Audible notification shall utilize temporal (Code 3) outputs.
6.
Separate covers shall be available to change application type on-site or for replacement.
A separate mounting plate shall allow wiring to be completed before appliance is
mounted. Mounting place shall allow mounting to a single-gang, double-gang, or 4-inch
square back box, flush or surface mount.
7.
Wiring supervision to each appliance shall allow “T-tapped” connections for Class B
circuits to simplify wiring. Wiring shall be unshielded twisted pair (UTP).
8.
Strobes shall be synchronized, 1 Hz flash.
9.
Wall Appliances – UL Standard 1971, UL Standard 464, California State Fire Marshal
(CSFM), ULC, FM
10.
Ceiling Appliances – UL Standard 1971, UL Standard 464, California State Fire Marshal
(CSFM), ULC, FM
11.
Color:
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 39
08 JAN 2016
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
12.
2.12
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
a.
White for Public and Sterile Areas including AOB Level 6-10, all AGTS Stations,
Concourses Level 2 and above, Terminal Levels 5 and 6, and public areas of
Terminal Levels 1, 2, 3, and 4.
b.
Red for back-of-house areas including AOB Level 4, 5A, 5B, and 11, Central
Plant, Concourses Level 0 and 1, Terminal Level 3, 4 and 7, non-public areas of
Terminal Level 1 and 2, and the AGTS Maintenance Building.
For outside or unconditioned locations, provide weatherproof appliances.
REMOTE LIGHTS
A. Remote indicating lights shall be provided only as indicated on the drawings, but are not
generally required due to the use of the color graphic workstations (TSW). Most existing
remote lights associated with applicable project shall be removed.
B. Remote indicators installed for monitoring of mechanical equipment shall be installed within
7’0” of floor level and directly beneath the equipment.
C. Exterior remote lights shall not be provided. All existing exterior remote lights associated with
applicable project shall be removed.
2.13
MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS
A. Units shall be listed to UL 228. Units are equipped for wall or floor mounting as indicated and
are complete with matching door plate. Unit shall operate from a 120VAC, a 24VAC or a
24VDC source, and develop a minimum of 25 lbs. holding force. Simplex DH24120 Series or
equal.
B. Mount any new outlet boxes for electric door holder to withstand 80 pounds pulling force.
Evaluate condition of existing boxes and repair as necessary.
2.14
SUPPRESSION INTERFACE DEVICES
A. Tamper Switches: Installed under a separate specification section, connection completed and
tested under these specification requirements.
B. Flow Switches: Installed under a separate specification section, connection completed and
tested under this specification requirements.
C. Sprinkler Pre-action Solenoid and Deluge Valves: Installed under a separate specification
section, complete with devices as required to provide for fire alarm system monitoring and
control functions.
D. Differential Pressure Switch: Installed under a separate specification section, connection
completed and tested under this specification requirements. Pressure switches to be
configured based on a separate specification section, but could consist of separate low air and
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 40
08 JAN 2016
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
alarm (high) pressure switches or a single device with two sets of contacts for the two pressure
conditions.
E.
2.15
Damper End Switches: Installed under a separate specification section, connection completed
and tested under this specification requirements. Coordinate with mechanical Contractor or
DEN HVAC Department.
BATTERIES
A. Standby Batteries capable of operating all fire alarm panels, transponder panels, and NAC
power supplies shall be provided to automatically back up the normal power. The system shall
have the capacity to operate a FACP or NAC Power Extender panel for 24 hours and
workstations for four hours, and then operate the fire alarm indicating devices for at least
fifteen (15) minutes. When commercial power is restored, the system shall transfer
automatically to primary power and shall not cause an alarm. System power supply shall be
equipped with battery charging circuits sufficient to recharge fully depleted batteries to within
70 percent of their maximum capacity within 12 hours.
2.16
1.
The system shall be provided with sufficient battery capacity to operate the entire system
upon loss of normal AC power in a normal supervisory mode for a period of 24 hours
with 15 minutes of alarm operation at the end of this period. The system shall
automatically transfer to battery standby upon power failure. All battery charging and
recharging operations shall be automatic.
2.
All TrueSite Workstations shall be provided with Uninterruptible Power Supplies to
support full operation for four hours.
3.
Batteries shall be sized with a spare capacity of 20%.
WIRING
A. All wiring shall be of the type as specified herein and as recommended by the manufacturer. All
wire shall be installed in conduit throughout except as noted herein and on the permit
drawings.
B. All Fire Alarm System wiring shall comply with NEC and NFPA requirements.
Color (+)
Color (-)
Size
AWG
Type
Insulation
Type
Red*
Black
12
Stranded (19)
THHN
Red*
Brown
12
Stranded (19)
THHN
IDC
Red w/
White stripe
Black w/
White stripe
16
Solid
TFN
SLC (IDNet+)
Red
White
16
Remote Lights
24 Volt Power
Yellow
Red
Purple
Black
16
14
Circuit
Audible NAC (Horn
only)
Visual NAC (Strobe
or Horn/Strobe)
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 41
Solid,
Twisted Pair
Solid
Solid
TFN
TFN
THHN
08 JAN 2016
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
Circuit
Color (+)
Color (-)
Size
AWG
Audio NAC (Fire
Alarm Speaker)
Red
Black
16
RUI Communication
Red
White
16
Red
Black
14
Stranded (19)
THHN
Red/Blue
Black/Brown
16
Solid
THHN
Audible NAC
(Sounder Base)
Duct Detector Remote
Test Switch
Addressable
Notification (IDNac)
Red
Solid,
Twisted Pair
Solid,
Twisted Pair
Insulation
Type
SHIELDED
SHIELDED
Stranded (19),
THHN,
Twisted Pair
unshielded
Connected to the positive terminal on each device.
Brown
*
Type
12
C. Wire for test switches with indicating lights shall be a 16 AWG solid THHN wire with the
following color code: (1) red + LED, (2) black - LED, (3) blue + test switch, and (4) brown test switch.
D. Wire associated with the AGTS Train Platform deluge systems activation circuits (i.e., key
activated stations) shall be an IDC with blue (+) and white (-) wire.
E.
Audio wire requirements shall be per DEN Standard Specifications Division 27 –
Communications, for Emergency Communications Systems.
F.
Subject to compliance with Simplex and NEC requirements, local suppliers include but are not
limited to the following: Liberty, Westpenn, ALLCABLE.
G. SLC, RUI, 24VDC Power, and Auxiliary Control wiring is not required to be installed in
conduit unless required per NFPA 70 National Electric Code, 2011 Denver Amendments to
the 2009 International Building Code, or all other applicable codes. To comply with Denver
Amendments, all fire alarm wiring shall be fully enclosed within continuous raceways in
mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, elevator equipment rooms, and vertical risers.
H. All fire alarm wiring installed “free run” (i.e. not in conduit) shall be plenum-rated per NFPA
70. Cable type “FPLP” in a red jacket shall be acceptable. All insulation color codes noted
above shall be maintained regardless of jacket type or color. Free run cable shall be supported
per NFPA 70 National Electric Code.
I.
All NAC wiring (conventional and addressable) shall be installed in metallic conduit and shall
comply with NFPA 70 and 72.
J.
All wiring shall test free from grounds and short circuit faults. No connections to the FACP
shall be made until the system wiring has been accepted by the Owner’s Designated
Representative and the equipment supplier.
K. Wire and cable shall be a type listed for its intended use by an approval agency acceptable to the
Authority Having Jurisdiction and shall be installed in accordance with the appropriate articles
from the current approved edition of NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 42
08 JAN 2016
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
L.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
Contractor shall obtain from the Fire Alarm System Manufacturer written instructions regarding
the appropriate wire/cable to be used for this installation. No deviation from the written
instruction shall be made by the Contractor without the prior written approval of the Fire
Alarm System Manufacturer, the Engineer, and the Owner.
M. Existing wiring may be used if warranted as new and with approval by the Engineer and the
Owner.
N. SLC communication (IDNet/IDNet+) and RUI channels shall utilize 16 Gauge solid twisted
wire. The wire installed shall not exceed 35 pF/ft and shall have a minimum of 4 twists per
foot. These wiring guidelines allow for a distance of 3600ft to the furthest device on a channel
with a maximum of 250 devices, and an overall wire length of 10,000 ft. No SLC channel
shall exceed .60 uF total capacitance and 35 Ohms resistance. Any conduit that is used for
multiple circuit types along with 1 or more SLC channels shall conform to “Table 19-1”
shown below.
O. Wiring requirements for mixed circuits in conduit or closely bundled: The below “Table 19-1”
shows when shielded wire must be used when mixed circuits are installed in conduit or are
bundled closely together. To use the table, select the signal in the leftmost column and
compare it to the cell that corresponds to the signal being mixed in the top row. STP =
Shielded Twisted Pair; UTP = Unshielded Twisted Pair.
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 43
08 JAN 2016
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
1.
P.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
Table 19-1 is from Tyco Fire Protection Products document “Simplex ES Alarm Panels
Wiring and Hook-Up Options Overview”, document number 0900-408, Revision N,
Revision Date 7 April 2015. This document is subject to change and shall be obtained
from SimplexGrinnell. To clarify Table 19-1, note 1, “When STP shows as being
required for two different circuits being evaluated and both circuits show STP needed,
only one of the two needs to use STP. Multiple circuits of IDNAC or TAA or
SmartSync or RP (DC) NACs may be grouped together and counted as one circuit.”
Circuits in the same conduit are limited as follows:
1.
Unless approved in writing by the Engineer and Owner, wiring for conventional NAC
(non-addressable) and SLC (IDNet) Circuits shall not be routed in the same conduit.
2.
SLC circuits and 24 volt power from a fire alarm control panel may be routed in the same
conduit. A maximum of 5 amps of 24 volt power shall be in the same conduit with SLC
circuits.
3.
No DC inductive loads greater than 5 amps 30VDC, or any AC voltage wiring, shall
share the same conduit as an SLC circuit at any time.
4.
RUI Communication shall always be shielded wiring if run in the same conduit (or
closely bundled) with IDNet (SLC) or IDNac (addressable NAC) wiring.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A. The Contractor shall provide a schedule to the Owner's Designated Representative indicating
the installation sequence and time frame prior to beginning work. Where an existing system is
being upgraded, this schedule shall include a detailed description indicating how the new
system replacement is to occur to ensure that the fire alarm and emergency communications
system will be out of service for not more than 10 hours per day. The Contractor shall provide
weekly updates to the Owner's Designated Representative.
B. Coordinate work of this Section with other affected work and construction schedule. The
Contractor’s Migration Plan per Article 1.12 of this Section shall include a plan to “phase” the
installation from the existing system to the new system. The submittal shall include sufficient
details to clearly define which equipment will be installed during the phases, and how
emergency response will be affected during the conversion process. This submittal shall
address how emergency personnel will monitor and control the two operational systems
during the conversion process.
C. Obtain Fire Department Permits per Article 1.3 of this Section, and Electrical Rough-In Permits
required for this installation.
D. The Contractor shall not order any equipment nor perform any installations prior to completion
of review of the submittals by the Owner and the Owner’s Designated Representative and
receipt of a written authority to proceed from the Owner.
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 44
08 JAN 2016
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
3.2
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
CONTRACTOR COORDINATION RESPONSIBILITIES
A. The Contractor shall coordinate work in this Section with all related trades and shall be
responsible for ensuring all work related to the fire alarm and emergency communications
system is performed per the Contract Documents, including, but not be limited to:
1.
Provide and install all wiring up to and including connection to all existing and new
sprinkler water flow switches and any other sprinkler system supervisory switches. All
sprinkler water flow and supervisory switches shall be monitored for integrity in
accordance with NFPA 72.
2.
Verification of the quantity and location of all sprinkler water flow and supervisory
switches; additional sprinkler water flow and supervisory switches shall be monitored
accordingly and additional addressable monitor modules shall be installed and
programmed, as necessary. Final locations shall be approved by the Owner’s Designated
Representative.
3.
Provide and install all wiring up to and including connection to a fire alarm relay adjacent
to the elevator control unit. The Contractor shall provide the fire alarm relay and its
enclosure, and shall coordinate the interconnection of the systems.
a.
Elevator recall functionality is to be provided by the elevator contractor. The
Contractor shall coordinate with the elevator contractor to interface the fire alarm
system to the elevator controller.
b.
Elevator contractor’s fee shall be paid as directed in Division 01.
4.
Provide and install addressable modules for the signal connections to the fire pump
controller. Fire pump supervision contacts shall be connected to the FACP in accordance
with the current edition of NFPA 20.
5.
Provide and install all wiring up to and including connection to fire alarm relays adjacent
to each HVAC system fan and damper controls.
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
a.
Fan control circuits are to be provided by the HVAC contractor or Owner. The
Contractor shall provide the fire alarm relay and its enclosure. The Contractor shall
coordinate with the HVAC contractor or Owner to interface the fire alarm system
to the HVAC controller.
b.
Where smoke dampers are present in the building, they shall be controlled by the
FACP and shall be programmed to operate as designed and indicated on the
drawings. The Contractor shall field verify quantity and location of dampers;
additional control relay output modules shall be installed and programmed, as
necessary. Final locations shall be approved by the Engineer. Confirm operation is
in accordance with the Engineer’s matrix for sequence of operation.
c.
Contractor shall be responsible for modifications required to existing dampers that
provide thermal override function. Shop drawings contain detailed instructions on
these dampers including electrical modifications to be made, labeling of dampers,
and signage/tags to be placed at existing control module and wiring termination
locations. Contractor shall coordinate with HVAC contractor or Owner on all
dampers that are designated to be de-commissioned. Contractor shall field verify
quantity, type, and location of all thermal override dampers and identify all
dampers found that are not included on the drawings through the Request-forInformation (RFI) process.
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 45
08 JAN 2016
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
3.3
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
6.
Provide and install circuits for magnetic door hold-open devices such that upon alarm or
loss of power, selected magnetic door hold-open devices shall release, allowing the held
open door to automatically close.
7.
Provide and install circuits for security/access control release devices such that upon
approved sequence of operation shall release the door. Contractor shall coordinate with
DEN Security to interface the fire alarm system to each security door.
8.
Provide and install circuits for linear heat detection located within Xcel Energy electrical
vaults. Contractor shall coordinate with DEN and Xcel Energy to obtain access and to
work within all electrical vaults. Xcel Energy’s fee shall be paid as directed in Division
01.
PRE WORK MEETING
A. The Contractor shall coordinate and arrange a pre work meeting with the DEN Project Manager,
DEN Project Inspectors and DEN Life Safety team one week in advance of the beginning of
any work. The Contractor shall assure attendance of trades installing the fire alarm system and
systems controlled or monitored by the fire alarm system. The Contractor shall review the
construction, demolition, phasing, implementation and testing plans, and schedule, as well as
all work to be performed by sub-contractors.
3.4
INSTALLATION
A. Furnish and install a complete fire alarm system as described in the Contract Documents and as
in the RFP. Include sufficient control units and peripheral devices, wiring, terminations,
electrical boxes, and all other necessary material for a complete operating system.
B. All Contractor’s work shall be performed in accordance with the best and the most modern
practices of the trade. The final installation shall present a neat and workmanlike appearance.
C. The Contractor shall install the entire system in a workmanlike manner, in accordance with the
manufacturer’s standard instructions, and in accordance with approved wiring diagrams unless
otherwise specifically permitted by the Owner's Designated Representative, or as modified by
this specification.
D. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all additional raceways or wiring required, but
not shown on the Contract Drawings. Included shall be all wiring required between
control/auxiliary relays and monitor modules for the equipment to be controlled (i.e., EP/PE
switches, motor control centers, individually mounted motor controllers, tamper switches,
flow switches, new and existing notification appliance locations, and any other devices to
which wiring connections are required for producing a complete and operational system).
E.
Wiring/Signal Transmission:
1.
Signal Transmissions: Transmission shall be hard-wired using addressable signal
transmission, dedicated to fire alarm service only.
2.
System Circuits:
a.
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
Initiating device circuits shall be Class B;
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 46
08 JAN 2016
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
F.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
b.
Signaling line circuits shall be Class B;
c.
Notification appliance circuits shall be Class B;
d.
Remote unit interface circuits shall be Class B except in the Center Core where it
shall be Class A.
e.
Network communications between system nodes shall be Class X using Optical
Fibers.
3.
Circuit Supervision: Circuit faults shall be indicated by a trouble signal at the associated
FACP and TrueSite Workstations. Provide a distinctive indicating audible tone and
alphanumeric annunciation, along with a graphical indication of the device and/or
circuitry experiencing the trouble condition.
4.
All fire alarm circuits shall be minimum Level 1 Survivable per NFPA 72.
Wire and Cable:
1.
All wiring shall be installed in metal raceway or within equipment except as noted herein
and on the permit drawings.
2.
All wiring shall be installed continuous from device to device except where conduit
length exceeds 300 feet or where agreed upon with DEN Engineer. Raceways containing
conductors identified as "fire alarm and emergency communications system" conductors
shall not contain other conductors, and no AC carrying conductors shall be allowed in
the same raceway with the DC fire alarm and emergency communications system
detection and signaling conductors.
3.
Conductors shall be installed in accordance with Section 260519 and the requirements of
this Section. Fire alarm conductors installed within equipment enclosures shall be
carefully cabled and labeled.
4.
Approved branch circuits
a.
Branch circuits shall be permitted as approved on the shop drawings.
b.
Approved branch circuits to a single device are permitted. Wire connections in a
junction box used to connect the branch circuit to a single box shall utilize a Wago
COMPACT connector, Ideal In-Sure push in connectors, or approved equal.
c.
Approved branch circuits to multiple devices are permitted only as approved by
DEN in writing.
5.
Individual conductors shall be tagged with markers indicating circuit number and type.
Markers shall be used on all conductors at each outlet or pull box at each equipment
enclosure.
6.
All wiring shall test free from grounds and short circuit faults. No connections to the
FACP shall be made until the system wiring has been accepted by the designated
equipment suppliers’ representative.
7.
The field location of the End-of-Line Resistors (for non-addressable switches and
devices) and fault circuit isolators shall be labeled so that the devices may be easily
located. The location shall be noted on the point-to-point and record drawings.
8.
New wire shall not be installed within existing raceway containing existing and/or
energized wiring.
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 47
08 JAN 2016
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
G. Conduit: Conduits shall be installed in accordance with Section 260533 – Raceways and Boxes
for Electrical Systems. All alarm wiring shall be installed in metal conduit, minimum of 1/2”
EMT, except as noted herein or on permit drawings. Conduit shall be factory finished red.
1.
Raceways shall be run parallel and perpendicular to the walls and ceilings. Wherever
practical, exposed raceways shall be run on the ceiling as close as possible to a wall or as
high as possible on a wall. Where concealed, provide access panels for all junction
boxes, pull boxes, and conduit bodies per NFPA 70 (NEC). Throated connectors shall be
required at all conduit terminations.
2.
Where exposed raceways must cross under a structural beam or rib, they shall be run
down one side of the beam or rib, across its bottom, and up to the ceiling on the other
side of the beam or rib. No spanning from beam to beam or rib to rib will be permitted.
The use of a conduit body on one side of a beam or rib will be permitted provided it will
be readily accessible.
3.
The method and location of all exposed conduit and raceways shall be approved by the
Owner’s Designated Representative prior to start of any installation work.
4.
All conduit shall be new unless approved in writing by the Owner. Existing conduit shall
be deemed acceptable for re-use if the existing conduit installation is compliant with
NFPA 70 National Electric Code, if no structural degradation is evident, and general
routing and configuration of concealed conduit (i.e., conduit in structure) can be
determined. Underground conduit, conduit installed in or on slab-on-grade, or conduit
with obvious signs of water, chemical, or structural damage shall not be reused.
5.
Where existing conduit is permitted to be reused based on other sections, conduits shall
be supported in compliance with current NEC requirements and shall be painted red
and/or labeled “FIRE ALARM” every 10 feet where accessible. Existing conduit that is
re-used shall be accurately shown on the as-built drawings.
6.
All existing fire alarm conduit that is not re-used in the new system shall be demolished
or tagged as “Future Fire Alarm” in accordance with DEN standards. Existing fire alarm
conduit that cannot be re-used due to structural degradation and cannot be demolished
(i.e., removed) shall be tagged as “Damaged Conduit. Do Not Use.”
7.
Reuse of Existing Cable Tray: New fire alarm cable is allowed to be installed in existing
fire alarm cable tray under the following conditions:
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
a.
All new cable shall be neatly bundled and properly supported at intervals required
by NFPA 70, but not more than 5 feet.
b.
All new cable shall be installed so that cables are not subject to damage by normal
building use.
c.
All new cable installed within existing cable tray shall be Plenum-rated (i.e.,
FPLP) or equal.
d.
Splices are not permitted within cable tray.
e.
All new cable entering or exiting the cable tray shall be installed in conduit. Nylon
bushings are required on all fittings.
f.
All new cable entering or exiting the cable tray shall be clearly labeled.
g.
All notification appliance (conventional or addressable NAC) wiring shall be in
conduit and is not permitted to be installed within the cable tray.
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 48
08 JAN 2016
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
h.
8.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
After fire alarm migration is complete, the existing EST fire alarm cabling shall be
carefully removed (i.e. demolished) from the cable tray. If it is practically
impossible to remove existing wiring without damaging other systems or cables,
the decision to leave existing, unused wiring in the cable tray must be submitted
and approved in writing by DEN. DEN’s decision on the deposition of old wiring
is final. At a minimum, if existing, unused wiring is allowed to remain, it shall be
terminated at each end and labeled accordingly.
Reuse of Existing Penetrations or Sleeves: Existing floor or wall penetrations may be
used if submitted and approved in writing by DEN. If allowed for use, Contractor shall
be responsible for repair or replacement of all listed fire stopping assemblies.
H. Boxes: As specified on fire alarm shop drawings. Outlet, pull and junction boxes shall be
painted red on the exterior and shall be installed in accordance with Section 260533 –
Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems. Box covers shall be painted red and identified by
initiating and signaling line system numbers on an approved self-adhesive label on the box
cover. Existing boxes that are not re-used in the new system shall be demolished or tagged as
“Future Fire Alarm” in accordance with DEN standards.
1.
I.
Fire Alarm Terminal Cabinets. Where indicated on the drawing floor plans or riser
diagrams, provide Fire Alarm Terminal Cabinets for field splicing of cables at riser
terminations. Provide NEMA 1, hinged cover, red enclosure/cabinet of adequate size for
each location and shall be labeled as “Fire Alarm Terminal Cabinet”. Provide screw lock
or if cabinet is key-locked, provide 2 spare keys per cabinet or key alike with Simplex
control panels. Space Age #SSU00635 TC1 18-Point Terminal Cabinet, #SSU00645
TC2 32-Point Terminal Cabinet, or equal shall be acceptable.
Device installation:
1.
Test stations and keys for any component testing should be accessible from the working
surface (floor) without use of any lift equipment (i.e., below 7’0” AFF).
2.
Detectors: All devices shall be installed to be fully accessible for testing and replacement.
Elevated device locations shall be coordinated with other trades to assure direct access
via ladders or lifts. Devices shall not be placed above conduit, duct work, lights, etc.
Where devices are installed under raised floors, devices shall be located to assure direct
access from the panel directly above the device without relocation of casework of fixed
equipment.
a.
Where replacing an existing detector with a new detector, Contractor shall relocate
the new device so that detector is accessible and is not located above switchgear
equipment or per other requirements of NFPA 70 and 72. Detectors shall not be
installed closer than 36” to any supply air register/diffuser unless approved
otherwise in writing by Engineer, Owner, and DFD.
3.
Control Panels shall be located as indicated on dimensioned electrical plans and elevation
drawings.
4.
All modules and individual devices shall be permanently marked with the system unique
computer address. The marking shall be red numbers/letters on white background 3/8”
high. When addresses are applied to the detector bases they shall be located at the
manufacturers point of test indicated on the detector. If devices are installed at heights
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 49
08 JAN 2016
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
above 12 feet, large letter markings shall be used so that the device address can be read
from the floor.
5.
J.
Monitor modules providing supervision for fire sprinkler devices, when located within
Fire Valve or Mechanical Rooms, shall be installed within a NEMA-rated Type 12
enclosure with hinged window door. Enclosure shall be Hoffman Inline Enclosure
model LHC236016 or equal, with enclosure size to be determined by the number of
modules required. Fire sprinkler monitor modules located in stairwells, small valve
closets, or when located individually shall not require rated enclosures. Contractor shall
provide EMT or liquid tight flexible non-metallic conduit from enclosure to monitored
device.
Isolation Modules: Four isolation modules shall be provided in the FACP for each IDNet+
circuit as a function of the SLC card. To the degree practicable, the SLC circuit shall utilize
all four of these isolated circuits in the design. Additionally, fault isolator modules shall be
provided at the following locations:
1.
At each floor when an SLC serves multiple floors if indicated on the riser diagram.
2.
At any approved multiple device branch circuit.
3.
After each IDNet NAC Power Extender panel or other types of conventional NAC
booster panels controlled by a SLC device. Note that this requirement may be reduced
where multiple NAC Power Extender panels are located in close proximity to one
another. In that configuration, provide fault isolation modules after the last NAC panel.
4.
At other locations deemed appropriate by the Engineer.
5.
Isolation shall be provided so that a single fault on a SLC pathway shall not cause the
loss of more than approximately 50 addressable devices in accordance with NFPA 722013 section 23.6.1. At no time shall a single fault on a SLC pathway cause the loss of
more than 75 addressable devices.
K. Labeling: All field devices, including initiating devices, monitor devices, control devices,
notification appliances, and junction boxes shall be field identified with a permanent label.
Labels shall indicate the complete device address including panel (node), circuit, and device
designation. Label type, size, color and configuration shall be approved by the Owner prior to
installation.
L.
All cutting, coring, and approved and listed fire stopping needed as a result of this work shall be
the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be coordinated with the Owner. See
Specification 017330.
M. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the integrity of all fire-rated and/or smokeproof assemblies.
N. Equipment Removal
1.
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
The Contractor shall completely remove the existing fire detection and alarm system
control equipment, components, and equipment that are not specified as being part of the
new system. The existing fire alarm equipment removed shall be boxed, labeled and shall
be given to the DEN Life Safety Team. Removed installation equipment shall be
disposed of by the Contractor. All unused, existing fire alarm and emergency
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 50
08 JAN 2016
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
communications system wire and cable shall be removed and properly disposed of offsite by the Contractor.
2.
The Contractor shall perform all removal work efforts in accordance with the best and
most modern practices.
3.
For existing wiring located within cable tray, see requirements provided above under
“Reuse of Existing Cable Tray.”
O. All fire alarm panels shall have a smoke detector located within a distance of the panel location
to comply with NFPA 72, including NAC Power Supplies and Transponders.
3.5
SYSTEM INTERRUPTION
A. System interruptions shall be pre-approved by DEN and detailed in the project’s
phasing/migration plan.
B. Interruption Request: Contractor must obtain all required signatures and written approval from
DEN Maintenance Control for interruption and or disconnection of any fire alarm devices.
Contractor shall conform to all DEN standard shut-down request processes.
C. Prior to any disconnection of equipment or devices, notify the DEN Project Manager through
the DEN standard shut-down request processes with 5-day minimum advance notice.
D. Fire Watch: The Contractor is responsible for maintaining a DFD approved fire watch during
work on a system that has had an unplanned fire alarm system interruption until such time that
the equipment has been restored.
E.
Fire alarm and detection outages shall be minimized to the extent possible. Contractor shall
coordinate all fire alarm system outages with the Owner. Additionally, Contractor shall install
the new systems in a manner that will minimize the time that the fire alarm system is not
functional.
F.
The FACP shall be able to initiate notification devices in the building at all times unless special
arrangements are coordinated with and approved by the Owner.
G. Unless a fire watch is provided, either smoke detection or monitoring of the sprinkler system
shall be provided for all areas of the building. If any area exists where both detection and
monitoring of the sprinkler system are not available, immediate notification shall be provided
to DFD and a roaming fire watch shall be provided.
H. Contractor shall conduct as much of the work as possible with the FACP fully functional.
Contractor is to wire initiating devices by area and connect to the FACP once wiring is
completed.
I.
If an unplanned fire alarm system interruption occurs for any reason, the Contractor shall
instantly provide a roving fire watch and notify the DEN Project Manager and DEN Life
Safety.
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 51
08 JAN 2016
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
J.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
If at any time building functions are bypassed, a fire alarm panel fire watch shall be provided.
The panel fire watch shall be capable of initiating notification devices throughout the building.
K. Contractor shall adhere to DEN black-out periods where no migration or testing can occur
including Thanksgiving and Christmas Holiday periods and snow emergencies. Exact blackout dates shall be confirmed with DEN construction management.
3.6
TESTING AND CERTIFICATION
A. General Testing Requirements
1.
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to arrange for inspections and testing
between the manufacturer/vendor, DEN representatives, Engineer of Record, and DFD
representatives. The Contractor shall provide qualified construction personnel
knowledgeable of all NFPA fire alarm testing requirements during system testing.
2.
The Contractor shall provide a detailed test plan that addresses sequence of testing as it
relates to the overall project schedule, tests to be performed, and organizations required
being notified and/or present at each test. Contractor shall coordinate test plan with the
Owner and Engineer. Upon request, the test plan shall be provided to DEN and may be
forwarded to the AHJ for acceptance.
3.
Overtime testing (i.e., night testing) for all activities which are deemed by DEN to cause
public inconvenience shall be provided. The DEN Life Safety team shall be included as a
required presence in all proof testing with DFD. Contractor shall coordinate same.
4.
All tests and test documentation shall comply with NFPA 72. Contractor shall fully test
all programmed sequences and provide an executed Record of Completion prior to
requesting a Demonstration Test with the Owner and Engineer.
5.
All tests and test documentation shall comply with the Denver Amendments to the IFC.
6.
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all equipment necessary to test the
system for all tests including the following:
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
a.
Magnets
b.
Canned smoke
c.
Audio sound pressure meter
d.
Intelligibility meter
e.
Multi-Voltage meter
f.
Ladders and lifts
g.
Air velocity meter and/or manometer (air pressure differential)
h.
Some equipment can be checked out from DEN Life Safety with advance notice
including:
1)
Smoke detector test unit with ability to reach all smoke detectors
2)
Heat detector tester (combined unit with smoke detector tester)
3)
Communication source (radios)
4)
Simplex TrueStart meter
5)
Theatrical smoke generator
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 52
08 JAN 2016
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
B. Pre-Test
1.
A pre-test of the added components shall be conducted by the Contractor. Any
deficiencies found shall be corrected prior to the Migration Test. The Contractor shall be
responsible for all costs associated with damage to the existing Fire Alarm system due to
incorrect wiring or installation of the new system. The Contractor shall provide all
equipment required for testing. The Contractor shall perform all testing in accordance
with NFPA and published manufacturer recommendations.
2.
Installation of all equipment or devices monitored or controlled by the Fire Alarm System
shall be complete except for connections. Conductors shall be installed and labeled in
accordance with Contract Documents. Conductors shall be tested prior to attachment of
devices in compliance with NFPA 72, including but not limited to:
3.
a.
Resistance
b.
Ground faults
c.
Short circuit fault
d.
Stray Voltage
Raceway, Boxes and Conductor Inspection by DEN: Contractor shall complete
construction and installation of all raceways, boxes, devices, conductors, contactors and
connectors in accordance with Construction Documents. All pull boxes, device boxes,
and equipment boxes shall be left open for inspection.
C. Migration Test
1.
Fire Alarm System Device(s) Installation: Installation of all equipment or devices
monitored or controlled by the Fire Alarm System shall be complete and operational at
the time of testing, except for connection to the existing building Fire Alarm System.
Fire Alarm devices and control equipment shall be installed and labeled per Contract
Documents, including device numbers per approved Fire Alarm shop drawings. All
devices shall be dust protected except during testing as necessary.
2.
Migration/System Connection: A point-to-point test of the added components shall be
conducted by the Contractor and manufacturer/vendor on the same work shift that the
points are migrated. Any deficiencies found shall be corrected prior to the Sequence
Test. The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs associated with damage to the
existing Fire Alarm system due to incorrect wiring or installation of the new system. The
Contractor shall provide all equipment required for testing. The Contractor shall perform
all testing in accordance with NFPA and published manufacturer recommendations.
Testing shall include but not be limited to:
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
a.
The functional operation of each re-settable initiating device (manual stations,
detectors, etc.) and circuit.
b.
The functional operation of all alarm devices and circuits.
c.
The functional operation of each monitored device circuit.
d.
The functional operation of each control circuit, including fan controls.
e.
The supervision functions of each initiating, indicating, monitoring, control and
supply circuit.
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 53
08 JAN 2016
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
3.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
In many cases, the migration of a device to the Simplex system will mean the former EST
system device will be de-commissioned. The installing Contractor is responsible for
coordinating a daily (per-shift) list with DEN regarding the devices that are migrated
(on-line) and de-commissioned (removed from service). See also Article 1.12.B.2.
D. Sequence Test
1.
E.
Upon completion of migration testing for a given floor/area, the Contractor and
manufacturer shall complete a programmed sequence test for each device. All systems
and devices monitored and or controlled by the Fire Alarm System shall be complete,
tested and operational and the approved sequence of operation for each device shall have
been programmed into the system. Each sequence of operation shall be tested, including
sequences linked with activation of devices in adjacent areas that command operation or
activation of devices in the new area of construction. Testing shall include but not be
limited to:
a.
The programmed sequence of operation of each re-settable initiating device
(manual stations, detectors, etc.).
b.
The functional confirmation of all required outputs based on the tested input.
c.
Any deficiencies found shall be corrected, the system reprogrammed, and retested
for verification.
2.
Sequence testing may be required during night time hours and are subject to advance
scheduling approval from DEN.
3.
At the conclusion of all sequence testing, the Contractor and manufacturer shall certify in
writing the following:
a.
Each device is correctly labeled in the field and on the TSW.
b.
All wires are correctly labeled.
c.
All boxes are correctly labeled indicating circuits.
d.
Program sequence is correct and compliant with Code requirements.
e.
Verify Contractor device and conduit as-built documents are accurate.
f.
All sequences driven by the programming sequence have been checked and are
without error.
Demonstration Test
1.
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
After all sequence testing has been completed for a given Node, the Contractor shall
request a Demonstration Test with the following:
a.
Completely executed Record of Completion for the Node (FACP).
b.
Certification that the system has been installed in compliance with Contract
Documents and NFPA 72. Certification shall comply with DFD requirements and
NFPA 72.
c.
Written verification by the Fire Alarm System Programmer that the programming
is complete and ready for testing.
d.
One legible copy of fire alarm shop as-built drawings. Electronic/scanned copy of
Contractor’s red-lined as-built drawings shall be acceptable.
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 54
08 JAN 2016
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
2.
F.
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
e.
One legible copy of manufacturer’s testing procedures for each device.
f.
List of each fire alarm device installed including address if provided on shop
drawings.
The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating and conducting the Demonstration
Test in the presence of the manufacturer and Engineer of Record. The Contractor shall
provide all equipment required for testing. The Contractor shall perform all testing in
accordance with NFPA and published manufacturer recommendations. Testing shall
include but not be limited to:
a.
The functional operation of each re-settable initiating device (manual stations,
detectors, etc.) and circuit.
b.
The functional operation of all alarm devices and circuits.
c.
The functional operation of each monitored device circuit.
d.
The functional operation of each control circuit, including fan controls.
e.
The supervision functions of each initiating, indicating, monitoring, control and
supply circuit.
f.
The programmed sequence of operation of each re-settable initiating device
(manual stations, detectors, etc.).
g.
The functional confirmation of all required outputs based on the tested input.
h.
Up to one-half of all tests may be performed on battery standby power or as
otherwise directed by the Engineer.
3.
Smoke Testing: The smoke control systems will require testing at the Demonstration Test
to verify the sequence of operation and proper system control. The Contractor shall
perform smoke testing during sequencing tests if the Contractor’s scope includes work
that modifies the nature of ceiling openings, ceiling configuration, draft stops, supply
HVAC, smoke control fans, walls above ceilings, etc. Ceiling/area modifications and
storefront modifications may require smoke testing during the DFD Proof Test. Any
deficiencies found shall be corrected, the system reprogrammed, and retested for
verification.
4.
Security Door Testing: Contractor shall provide sufficient manpower during security
door testing events so that unauthorized access is not gained through security doors.
5.
If unsatisfactory results occur during the Demonstration Test, the Contractor shall be
responsible for any and all additional charges incurred by the Engineer or Owner with
respect to corrective action, including but not limited to test monitoring and engineering
services during the time it takes to obtain Final Acceptance by the Engineer.
DFD Proof Test
1.
All system alterations and additions must be tested and accepted by the Denver Building
Department and the Denver Fire Department. Proof testing of installations or additions
to the fire alarm systems in public areas requires night testing to minimize operational
disruptions. Proof Testing shall not be performed during City Holidays and must be
scheduled in advance.
a.
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
DFD Notification: The Contractor (after successful Engineer demonstration testing
is completed) shall provide a written notice to the Denver Fire Department for
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 55
08 JAN 2016
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
testing at least seven days in advance of the time and date requested for the test
date. The Contractor shall copy the Project Manager concurrently. The request for
testing shall include itemization of devices and systems to be tested in the format
as required by the Denver Fire Department.
2.
The Contractor responsibilities at the time of the Proof test: The Contractor shall make
available the Stamped set of drawings with changes approved by the Denver Fire
Department Fire Prevention Engineer. The Contractor shall provide the following:
a.
Documentation:
1)
Original #3 & #3A permits including building department stamped prints.
2)
One copy of marked up record as-built drawings installed in Building Fire
Command Room.
3)
Contractor’s written certification the system installation complies with
NFPA requirements (i.e., Record of Completion).
b.
The Contractor representatives for each trade shall be available at the test and shall
activate and monitor devices for the test. Contractor shall be prepared to modify or
repair system(s) installation at time of the Proof Test if directed by the DFD.
Testing shall include all devices installed and shall include activation/shut down of
equipment controlled or monitored by the installation (i.e. fill of dry sprinkler
systems, smoke fans, fire doors, elevators, etc.).
3.
Pre-Proof Test Meeting: Contractor shall review constructed area with DFD. General
scope and systems modifications shall be reviewed. Contractor shall introduce the
representatives of each trade. Review of items listed in paragraph 2 above shall be
completed. Incomplete preparation and/or incomplete submittals noted in paragraph 2 at
the time of the Proof Test may be cause for DFD cancellation of the Proof Test.
4.
Two Denver Fire Inspectors shall observe and direct the proof test and sign off the #3A
Permit and Record of Completion subject to acceptance.
5.
The Contractor shall provide a completed and signed copy of the NFPA 72 Record of
Completion Form after the Demonstration Test has been completed.
6.
The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating and conducting the Proof Test in the
presence of the Engineer and DEN representative. Contractor shall test any and all
devices and programmed sequences requested by DFD. The Contractor shall provide all
equipment required for testing. The Contractor shall perform all testing in accordance
with NFPA and published manufacturer recommendations.
7.
If unsatisfactory results occur during the Proof Test, the Contractor shall be responsible
for any and all additional charges incurred by the Owner with respect to corrective
action, including but not limited to test monitoring and engineering services during the
time it takes to obtain Final Acceptance by the Owner.
8.
Final Acceptance by the Owner means that the fire alarm and emergency
communications system is:
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
a.
Completely operational and in conformance with this specification.
b.
In conformance with applicable codes and standards.
c.
All documentation has been submitted as required by these specifications.
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 56
08 JAN 2016
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 –ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 283100 – INTELLIGENT LIFE SAFETY FIRE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
DENVER INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
CONCOURSE B FIRE ALARM
REPLACEMENT
CONTRACT NO. 201524852
d.
All training as required by these specifications has been completed to the
satisfaction of the Owner’s Designated Representative.
e.
Alarm, supervisory and trouble annunciation through the AES system.
G. AHJ/Code Agency Inspection: Contractor shall be responsible to coordinate any other required
inspections or testing to close out open permits and/or correct all deficiencies.
3.7
TRAINING
A. Training of DEN personnel is provided through separate contracts and is not required under this
scope in excess of the system demonstration and migration status addressed above.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT
4.1
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement shall be made for work under this Section.
PART 5 - PAYMENT
5.1
METHOD OF PAYMENT
A. No separate payment will be made for work under this Section. Reference Allowances in the
Contract Bid form. The cost for all other work described in this section shall be included in
the Lump Sum Contract price.
END OF SECTION 283100
ISSUED FOR: BID
March 1, 2016
JENSEN HUGHES, INC.
283100 - 57
08 JAN 2016